Chh S 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ • 
 
 
 «• . 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - - 
 
 
 
 
 - T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
/ \ 
 
 THE 
 
 NATURAL. HISTORY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 
 * 
 
 HUMAN TEETH 
 
 EXPLAINING THEIR 
 
 STRUCTURE, USE, FORMATION, GROWTH, AND DISEASES. 
 
 \ * % 
 
 ILLUSTRATED WITH COPPER-PLATES. 
 
 TO WHICH IS ADDED, 
 
 A 
 
 PRACTICAL TREATISE on the DISEASES of the TEETH, 
 
 BY JOHN HUNTER, 
 
 SURGEON EXTRAORDINARY TO THE KINO, AND FELLOW OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY, 
 
 THE THIRD EDITION. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 PRINTED FOR J. JOHNSON, NO. 72, ST. PAUL’S CHURCH-YARD. 
 
 BY W. 5PIL3BURY, SNOWHILL* 
 
 
 1803. 
 

 U-'U 
 14 o 
 
 . U A I -I 4 v' 
 
 18 0.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 " ' - 
 
 
 
 
 
 „> ? »f 
 
 
 •* # ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ i r / * rr- r r* ' 
 
 T Vi 3 M 3 3 ITfl 3 VCJA 
 
 
 ; . • :v. . »' 
 
 jrft m .feankJjrtoD aaoilf 
 
 i 
 
 \ •* 
 
 siotad loibuA s>rb ^d ab^o* '3is>w gniwollol 
 
 ooj erred t 'io '. A :n ith has fjKni^ sdi 
 » lolaoQ i)i € borreq ted* refk ^hmda 
 
 arlT «smffr?J -sdiot /* -o 'iritfoD aitrfrmH 
 
 rebnw tdybaxnyil .iM^ \4 nwtb arew 
 3gtw-tfS *riaabM vd b^vjstjcr.V bna - h .e^iodbuK 
 
 •aredto has tboBty I t noin§hO 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 * .: 
 
 ... ' j 
 
 % ... i 
 
 # • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 i 
 
 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 Most of the Observations contained in the 
 following Treatise were made by the Author before 
 the year 1755; and the substance of them con¬ 
 stantly demonstrated after that period, in Doctor 
 Hunter’s Course of Anatomical Lectures. The 
 Figures were drawn by Mr. Rymsdyk, under the 
 Author’s direction, and engraved by Messrs, Strange, 
 Grignion, Ryland, and others. 
 

 \ • 
 
 ,aTKa.Tifoa 
 
 " H - -V ' - V - -» « .< 
 
 . 1 . \ ‘I L\ L 
 
 .1 i •• £3. 
 
 ' • T 
 
 r 
 
 ■3 
 
 €> 
 
 $ 
 
 y 
 
 J i AJ 
 
 <*• - ; .• ■-> ■ - « 
 
 .L > a* ••.> : . •- - C ;» r • . " T ; 4 
 
 - . 
 
 * • - - - •vjrsV.x/: 1 "! Kh 4 tb j 
 
 9 . a&XshsSi'SHh'-mi 
 
 J - . .IV i '* • 
 
 4 # 
 
 y - - • /rs C tswoJL 3?.! r lo ; Jmo L 3rd:-' fli hckj 'M- s«r 1 3 
 
 • • - " l : J ; K.fi V. !£ ; ‘ ? ‘ > . 
 
 zi. 
 
 A (V 
 
 or- 
 
 \ 
 
 • • r > 
 
 J t ! - - ‘-'p* ^ 
 
 » • • r 
 
 • " • - - ■' • 
 
 
 
 M. 
 
 «+■ 
 
 P P , . T 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 _ _ _ 
 
 
 3» 
 
 
 • '*• ^ r 
 
 •' ... 
 
 ' • ' ' 
 
 
 - 
 
 -M" 
 
 .«»*• 
 
 « ( - 
 
 id 
 
 ■rr • to .^s- 
 
 J- Y i- 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 >- »- 
 
 
 T- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - ' 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 T 
 
 ; - — ’ ^ W 
 
 
 
 *• 
 
 - «es 
 
 rsr -ic 
 
 -a ^ 
 
 • **• •=*»■ r» -*1 
 
 * 
 
 > — 
 
 O' 
 
 • 
 
 
 _ __ •_ 
 
 
 
 • , * 
 
 
 
 .« 
 
 
 
 . A 
 
 
 9» 4T 
 
 — -V -r — 
 
 •rr - 
 
 . Ml 
 
 .- ? 
 
 
 ■> » 
 
 - cr -a 
 
 A 
 
 <» 
 
 
 ,<■= 
 
 r# 
 
 — — c— 
 
 sr ’ — TT .-ss 
 
 «<7*. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 •* 
 
 - 
 
 tfr 
 
 
 
 v , f •* . -f v ' 
 
 <’ j ‘ : v ' v J • 
 
 
 - • "V . 
 
 
 
 — “ ..— 
 
 
 •A 
 
 •5» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - '3 
 
 '.. ■ 
 
 
 
 — *rr * '•-• 
 
 
 
 - - - f " - dU'.'tCtfltlV^L 
 
 '■a *- 
 
 - - *. .siiVvDTiil 
 
 * ■ ^ « 
 
 r „ » * C'V * 
 
 t .. 
 
 - t: fti- V s' i ’0 ^r'>irir ifi,# 3 ti) IQ 
 
 * 
 
 «*’ >- ’ $n >,t S&r.iolvifrauQ srfl >0 
 
 ... • ‘ ' 
 
 ^pfc>dt iO 
 
 . V ' f ■ i noii&crt (2 id; K> 
 
 *ttoT ladctmVL odb "tQ 
 
 - - - 13198*3*1 5fft IO 
 
 • * - > 3 fft H > 
 
 e aril iO 
 
 ai >i -aO 9d r tO 
 
 i :>. ^iwniih. otk iO 
 
 ' - ; - / 
 
 ■ ;e-di .o x "■/„'vi: O 
 
 *• ' - ' - 'wxi ip rro J. 
 
 hsqm< r j h 
 
 q*)$H .... Hi aa~ v u >-'- 
 
 »« i ^ 
 
 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 OF PART THE FIRST. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 liF the Upper Jaw - -- -- -- -- -- - 1 
 
 Of the Lower jaw------------ - 3 
 
 Of the Alveolar Processes - -- -- -- -- - 6 
 
 Of the Articulation of the Lower Jaw - -- -- -- 9 
 
 Of the Motion in the Joint of the Lower Jaw - - - - 12 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Lower Jaw - -- -- -- -15 
 
 Temporalis - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 19 
 
 Pterygoidceus Intertills - -- -- -- -- -- -22 
 
 Pterygoidceus Bxternus ------------ 23 
 
 Digastricus - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 25 
 
 Of the Structure of a Tooth - -- -- -- -- -S3 
 
 Of the Enamel - -- - --------- - ib. 
 
 Of the Bony Part of a Tooth - -- -- -- --36 
 
 Of the Cavity of the Teeth - - - - - - - - ~ - - 41 
 
 Of the Periosteum of the Teeth - -- -- - ---43 
 
 Of the Situation of the Teeth - -,-------44 
 
 Of the Number of Teeth ----------- 4 6 
 
 Of the Tncisores - -- -- -- -- -- -- -49 
 
 Of the Cuspidatus - -- ----- -----52 
 
 Of the Bicuspides - -- -- -- -- -- --55 
 
 Of the Grinders - -- -- -- -- -- --53 
 
 Of the Articulation of the Teeth - -- -- -- -65 
 
 Of the Gums - -- -- -- -- -- -- - 66 
 
 Of the Action of the Teeth arising from the Motion of the 
 Lower Jaw - -- -- -- -- -- -- -68 
 
 General Comparisons between the Motion of the Jaw in 
 young and in old People - -- -- -- -- -72 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Of the Formation of the Alveolar Process ----- 74 
 
 Of the Formation of the Teeth in the Foetus - - - - 77 
 
 Of the Cause of Pain in Dentition - -- -- -- 80 
 
 Of the Formation and Progress of the Adult Teeth - - 82 
 
 Of the Manner in which a Tooth is formed ----- 86 
 
 Of the Ossification of a Tooth upon the Pulp - - - - 88 
 
 Of the Formation of the Enamel - -- -- - --94 
 
 Of the Manner of Shedding of Teeth - -- -- --98 
 
 Of the Growth of the two Jaws - -- -- -- -- 101 
 
 The Reason for the Shedding of the Teeth ----- 105 
 Of the Cavity filling up as the Teeth wear down - - - 108 
 
 Of the continual Growth of the Teeth - - - - - -110 
 
 Of the Sensibility of Teeth - - - -... - - - - - 114 
 
 Of Supernumerary Teeth - £ Qlni 
 
 The Use of the Teeth so far as they affect the Voice - - 117 
 Of the Class, among Animals, of the Human Teeth - - 119 
 
 Of the Diseases of the Teeth - - - - - «* r - - <*121 
 
 JlDIflW 2TTBu vctXflJ- flO VljiiJnifn ' -* 
 
 Of Cleaning the Teeth - -- -- -- - - - - 124 
 
 Of Transplanting the Teeth ------ P^D^flflOD 
 
 Sixteen Plates and Explanations. 
 
 lioxfiw 4 
 
 B 
 
 PART 
 
 * 
 
 

 5109 ’ 
 
 fi 3o nor 
 
 
 PART THE FIRST. 
 
 OF THE 
 
 - / - ~ - cWill OWj )flt 
 
 UPPER JAW. 
 
 t J I>!ll ii. 
 
 If) II if El 
 
 lO 
 
 K) 
 
 p i 
 
 TA 
 
 1 1 J )1 J 
 
 (T 
 
 t ioj nogsdJi on l 
 If! y7)7i> ) arfi 30 
 IxjOLiiJnoo od J iO 
 
 we enter into a description of the Teeth 
 
 Before 
 
 themselves, it will be necessary to give an account 
 
 of the Upper and Lower Jaw-bones, in which they 
 
 are inserted ; insisting minutely on those parts which 
 
 are connected with the Teeth, or serve for their motion 
 
 * 
 
 and action, and passing over the others slightly. 
 
 The Upper Jaw is composed of two bones, which 
 generally remain distinct through life. They are very 
 irregular at their posterior and upper parts, sending 
 upwards and backwards a great many processes, that 
 are connected with the bones of the Face and Skull 
 The lower and anterior parts of the Upper Jaw are 
 more uniform, making a kind of a circular sweep 
 from side to side, the convexity of which is turned for¬ 
 wards ; the lower part terminates in a thick edge, full 
 
 of 
 
 * Vide Plate III. Fig. ist and 2d, AA. 
 
2 OF THE UPPER JAW. 
 
 of the sockets for the Teeth. This edge is called in each 
 bone the Alveolar Process*. Behind the Alveolar Pro¬ 
 cesses there are two horizontal lamellae, which, uniting 
 together, form part of the roof of the Mouth, which is 
 the partition between the Mouth and the Nose -f*. 
 
 This plate, or partition, is situated about half an inch 
 
 higher than the lower edge of the Alveolar Process; 
 
 * . 
 
 and this gives the roof of the Mouth a considerable 
 hollowness. 
 
 • * ; • < »> ’ . V ^, • 
 
 * * -• *- v - •• - j *»*• 'Vi ' ' 
 
 The use of the Upper Jaw is to form part of the 
 Paricties of the Mouth, Nose, and Orbits; to give a basis, 
 or supply the Alveolar Process, for the superior row of 
 Teeth, and to counteract the Lower Jaw: but it has no 
 motion itself upon the bones of the Head and Face. 
 
 * Vide Plate I. Fig. i. a, b , c, d. 
 f Vide Plate I. Fig. i. e, e. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OF 
 
o*h*spencer.m*d. 
 
 \ ■ % * 
 
 * * f _ • V ^ f v . • y •» 
 
 OF THE 
 
 LOWER JAW. 
 
 - ■ ' • . . . . ' . , • * r * \ 
 
 As the Lower Jaw is extremely moveable, and its 
 motion is indispensably necessary in all the various 
 operations of the Teeth, it requires to be more parti¬ 
 cularly described. It is much more simple in its form 
 than the Upper, having fewer processes, and these not 
 so irregular. Its anterior circular part is placed directly 
 under that of the Upper Jaw; but its other parts extend 
 farther backwards*. 
 
 This Jaw is at first composed of two distinct bonesf; 
 but these, soon after birth, unite into one, at the middle 
 of the chin. This union is called the Symphysis of 
 the Jaw. Upon the upper edge of the body of the 
 bone is placed the Alveolar Process, a good deal similar 
 to that of the Upper Jaw. The Alveolar Process ex¬ 
 tends all round the upper part of the bone, from the 
 Coronoide Process of one side to that of the other J, 
 In both Jaws they are every where relatively propor- 
 
 B tional 
 
 * Vide Plate III. Fig. I and 2. 
 f Vide Plate VIII. Fig. 1, 4, and 6, 
 t Vide Plate I. Fig. 2. 
 
4 OF THE LOWER JAW. 
 
 ” l 
 
 tional to the Teeth ; being thicker behind, where the 
 Teeth are larger, and more irregular, upon account of 
 the more numerous fangs inserted into them. The 
 Teeth that are situated backwards, in the Upper Jaw, 
 have more fangs than those that correspond with them 
 in the lower, and the sockets are accordingly more ir¬ 
 regular. The Alveolar Process of the Upper Jaw is a 
 section of a larger circle than that of the lower, espe¬ 
 cially when the Teeth are in the sockets. This arises 
 chiefly from the anterior Teeth in the Upper Jaw being 
 broader and flatter than those in the Lower The 
 
 i 
 
 posterior part of the bone on each side rises almost 
 perpendicularly, and terminates above in two processes -f; 
 the anterior of which is the highest, is thin and pointed, 
 and is called the Coronoide Process J. The ante¬ 
 rior edge of this process forms a ridge which goes 
 obliquely downward and forward on the Jaw, upon 
 the outside of the posterior sockets §. To this process 
 the Temporal Muscle is attached; and as it rises above 
 the centre of motion, that Muscle acts with nearly 
 equal advantage in all the different situations of the 
 Jaw. 
 
 The Posterior Process, which is made for a move- 
 able articulation with the head, runs upward, and a 
 
 little 
 
 * Vide Plates I. and III. 
 
 t Vide Plate III. Fig. 2. e ; and Plate IV. Fig, 2. 
 
 t Vide Plate IV. i i. 
 
 § Vide Plate IV. Fig. 2. B. 
 
OF THE LOWER JAW. 5 
 
 little backward; is.narrower, thicker, and shorter than 
 the anterior ; and terminates in an oblong rounded head, 
 or Condyle *, whose longest axis is nearly transverse. 
 The Condyle is bended a little forward; is rounded, or 
 convex, from the fore to the back part; and likewise 
 a little rounded from one end to the other, or from 
 right to left. Its external end is turned a little for¬ 
 ward, and its internal a little backward ; so that the 
 axis of the two Condyles are neither in the same 
 straight line, nor parallel to each other; but the axis 
 of each Condyle, if continued backwards, would meet, 
 and form an angle of about one hundred and forty-six 
 degrees ; and lines drawn from the Symphysis of the 
 Chin, to the middle of the Condyle, would intersect 
 their longest axis, at nearly right angles f. There 
 are, however, some exceptions; for in a Lov/er Jaw, of 
 which I have a drawing, the angle formed by the sup¬ 
 posed continuation of the two axes, instead of being an 
 angle of one hundred and forty-six degrees, is of one 
 hundred and ten only. The Lower Jaw serves for a base 
 to support the Teeth in the Alveolar Process, during 
 their action oil those of the Upper Jaw in mastication ; 
 and to give origin to some muscles that belong to other 
 parts. 
 
 B 2 OF 
 
 * Vide Plate IV. Fig. II. E. 
 
 t Vide Plate I. Fig, 2. or Plate IV. Fig. 2* 
 
OF THE 
 
 ALVEOLAR PROCESSES. 
 
 TH E Alveolar Processes are composed of two thin 
 bony plates, one external*, and the other internal f. 
 These two plates are at a greater distance from each 
 other at their posterior ends, than at the anterior 
 or middle part of the Jaw. They are united toge¬ 
 ther by thin bony partitions going across, which divide 
 the processes at the anterior part, into just as many 
 distinct sockets as there are Teeth;}:; but at the poste¬ 
 rior part, where the Teeth have more than one root, 
 or fang, there are distinct cells, or sockets, for every 
 root§. These transverse partitions are more protuberant 
 than the Alveolar Plates; and thus add laterally 
 to the depth of the cells, particularly at the ante¬ 
 rior part of the Jaw. At each partition, the exter¬ 
 nal plate of the Alveolar Process is depressed, and 
 
 forming furrows, or a fluting || round the cells, or 
 
 cavities, 
 
 * Vide Plate I, Fig. i. a 9 a } a y a y a , 
 
 f Vide Plate I. Fig. I. b y b, b» 
 
 J Vide Plate I. Fig. I. c, c, and Fig, 2> a. 
 
 § Vide Plate I. Fig. I, d y d» and Fig, 2. b, c . 
 
 | Vide Plate III. Fig. 2. F F F F. 
 
OF THE ALVEOLAR PROCESSES. 7 
 
 cavities, for the roots of the Teeth. This is observ¬ 
 able in the whole length of the Alveolar Process of the 
 Upper Jaw, and in the fore part particularly of the 
 Lower Jaw. The Alveolar Processes of each Jaw form 
 about one half of a circular, or rather of an elliptical * 
 figure ; and at the fore part in the Lower Jaw they 
 are perpendicular, but project inwards at the posterior 
 part, and describe a smaller circle than the body of the 
 bone upon which they stand f ; as we shall observe 
 more particularly hereafter, when we come to treat 
 of the Jaws of Old People 
 
 The Alveolar Processes of both Jaws should rather 
 be considered as belonging to the Teeth, than as parts 
 of the Jaws; for they begin to be formed with the 
 Teeth, keep pace with them in their growth, and 
 decay, and entirely disappear, when the Teeth fall; so 
 that, if we had no Teeth, it is likely we should not 
 only have no sockets, but not even these processes, in 
 which the sockets are formed ; and the Jaws can per¬ 
 form their motions, and give origin to muscles, with¬ 
 out either the Teeth, or Alveolar Processes. In short, 
 there is such a mutual dependence of the Teeth and 
 Alveolar Processes on each other, that the destruction of 
 the one seems to be always attended with that of the 
 other. 
 
 In 
 
 * Vide Plate I. Fig. 1. and 2. 
 f Vide Plate I. Fig. 2. 
 
8 OF THE ALVEOLAR PROCESSES. 
 
 In the head of a young subject which I examined, I 
 found that the two first Incisor Teeth in the Upper Jaw 
 had not cut the Gum; nor had they any root, or fang, 
 excepting so much as was necessary to fasten them to 
 the Gum, on their upper surface ; and on examining 
 the Jaw, I found there was no Alveolar Process, nor 
 sockets, in that part. What had been the cause of 
 this, I will not pretend to say: whether it was owing 
 to the Teeth forming not in the Jaw, but in the Gum, 
 or to the wasting of the fangs. The appearance of 
 the Tooth favoured the first supposition; for it was 
 not like those whose fangs are decayed in young sub¬ 
 jects, in order to the shedding of the Teeth ; and as 
 it did not cut the Gum, it is reasonable to think it 
 never had any fang. That end from which the fang 
 should have grown, was formed into two round and 
 smooth points, having each a small hole leading into 
 the body of the Tooth, which was pretty well formed. 
 
 
 OF 
 
OF THE 
 
 ARTICULATION of the LOWER JAW. 
 
 JU ST under the beginning of the Zygomatic Process 
 of each Temporal Bone, before the external Meatus 
 Auditorius, an oblong cavity may be observed; in 
 direction, length, and breadth, in some measure corre¬ 
 sponding with the Condyle of the Lower Jaw*. Be¬ 
 fore, and adjoining to this cavity, there is an oblong 
 eminence, placed in the same direction, convex upon 
 the top, in the direction of its shorter axis, which 
 runs from behind forwards ; and a little concave in 
 the direction of its longer axis, which runs from 
 within outwards. It is a little broader at its outer 
 extremity; as the outer corresponding end of the Con¬ 
 dyle describes a larger circle in its motion than the 
 inner f . The surface of the cavity, and eminence, is 
 covered with one continued smooth cartilaginous crust* 
 which is somewhat ligamentous; for, by putrefaction, 
 it peels off like a membrane, with the common Peri¬ 
 osteum. Both the cavity and eminence serve for the mo¬ 
 tion 
 
 * Vide Plate II. L. and Plate IV. EE. 
 
 t Vide Plate II. K. and Plate XIV. F F. 
 
10 
 
 OF THE ARTICULATION OF 
 
 tion of the Condyle of the Lower Jaw. The surface 
 of the cavity is directed downward; that of the emi¬ 
 nence downward and backward, in such a manner that 
 a transverse section of both would represent the Italic 
 letter S *. Though the eminence may, on a first view 
 of it, appear to project considerably below the cavity, 
 yet a line drawn from the bottom of the cavity to the 
 most depending part of the eminence, is almost hori¬ 
 zontal, and therefore nearly parallel with the line 
 made by the grinding surfaces of the Teeth in the Up¬ 
 per Jaw: and when we consider the Articulation far¬ 
 ther, we shall find that these two lines are so nearly 
 parallel, that the Condyle moves almost directly for¬ 
 wards, in passing from the cavity to the eminence ; 
 and the parallelism of the motion is also preserved by 
 the shape of an intermediate cartilage. 
 
 In this joint there is a moveable cartilage, which, 
 though common to both Condyle and cavity, ought to be 
 considered rather as an appendage of the former than of 
 the latter, being more closely connected with it; so as to 
 accompany it in its motion along the common surface of 
 both the cavity and eminence. This cartilage is nearly 
 of the same dimensions with the Condyle, which it 
 covers; is hollowed on its inferior surface, to receive 
 the Condyle : on its upper surface, it is more unequal, 
 being moulded to the cavity and eminence of the ar¬ 
 ticulating 
 
 * Vide Plate II. I, K. 
 
THE LOWER JAW. 
 
 11 
 
 ticulating surface of the Temporal Bone, though it is 
 considerably less, and is therefore capable of being 
 moved with the Condyle, from one part of that surface 
 to another *. Its texture is ligamento-cartilagineous. 
 This moveable cartilage is connected with both the 
 Condyle of the Jaw and the articulating surface of 
 the Temporal Bone, by distinct ligaments, arising from 
 
 t 
 
 its edges all round. That by which it is attached to 
 the Temporal Bone, is the most free and loose; though 
 both ligaments will allow an easy motion, or sliding 
 of the cartilage on the respective surfaces of the Con¬ 
 dyle and Temporal Bone. These attachments of the 
 cartilage are strengthened, and the whole articulation 
 secured, by an external ligament, which is common 
 to both, and which is fixed to the Temporal Bone, and 
 to the neck of the Condyle. On the inner surface of 
 the ligament, which attaches the cartilage to the Tem- 
 poral Bone, and backwards, in the cavity, is placed 
 what is commonly called the Gland of the Joint; at 
 least, the ligament is there much more vascular than at 
 any other part. 
 
 C 
 
 OF 
 
 * Vide Plate II. L. 
 
OF THE 
 
 MOTION IN THE JOINT OF THE LOWER JAW. 
 
 I 
 
 HP ‘ , -■ , • * ■ 
 
 1HE Lower Jaw, from the manner of its arti¬ 
 culation, is susceptible of a great many motions.— 
 The whole Jaw may be brought horizontally forwards 
 by the Condyles sliding from the cavity towards the 
 eminences on each side. This motion is performed 
 chiefly when the Teeth of the Lower Jaw are brought 
 directly under those of the Upper, in order to bite, or 
 hold any thing very fast between them. 
 
 Or, the Condyles only may be brought forwards, 
 while the rest of the Jaw is tilted backwards, as in 
 the case when the Mouth is open; for on that occasion 
 the angle of the Jaw is tilted backwards, and the chin 
 moves downwards, and a little backwards also. In 
 this last motion, the Condyle turns its face a little for¬ 
 wards ; and the centre of motion lies a little below 
 the Condyle, in the line between it and the angle of 
 the Jaw. By such an advancement of the Condyles 
 forwards, together with the rotation mentioned, the 
 aperture of the Mouth may be considerably enlarged 
 a circumstance necessary on many obvious occasions.. 
 
 The 
 
13 
 
 OF THE LOWER JAW. 
 
 The Condyles may also slide alternately backwards 
 and forwards, from the cavity to the eminence, and vice 
 versa ; so that while one Condyle advances, the other 
 moves backwards, turning the body of the Jaw from 
 side to side, and thus grinding, between the Teeth, the 
 morsel separated from the larger mass by the motion 
 first described. In this case, the centre of motion lies 
 exactly in the middle, between the two Condyles. And 
 it is to be observed, that in these slidings of the Condyles 
 forwards and backwards, the moveable cartilages do 
 not accompany the Condyles in the whole extent of 
 their motion; but only so far as to adapt their surfaces 
 to the different inequalities of the Temporal Bone : for 
 as these cartilages are hollow on their lower surfaces 
 where they receive the Condyle, and on their oppo¬ 
 site upper surfaces arc convex where they lie in the 
 cavity; but forwards, at the root of the eminence, that 
 upper surface is a little hollowed; if they accom¬ 
 panied the Condyles through the whole extent of their 
 motion, the eminences would be applied to the emi¬ 
 nences, the cavities would not be filled up, and the 
 whole articulation would be rendered very insecure. 
 
 This account of the motion of the Lower Jaw, and its 
 cartilages, clearly demonstrates the principal use of these 
 cartilages; namely, the security of the articulation: 
 the surfaces of the cartilage accommodating them- 
 
 C 2 selves 
 
14 
 
 OF THE MOTION, kc. 
 
 selves to the different inequalities, in the various and 
 free motions of this joint. This cartilage is also very 
 serviceable for preventing the parts from being hurt 
 by the friction ; a circumstance necessary to be guarded 
 against, where there is so much motion. Accord¬ 
 ingly, I find this cartilage in the different tribes of 
 Carnivorous Animals, where there is no eminence and 
 cavity, nor other apparatus for grinding ; and where 
 the motion is of the true ginglimus kind only. 
 
 In the Lower Jaw, as in all the joints of the body, when 
 the motion is carried to its greatest extent, in any direc¬ 
 tion, the muscles and ligaments are strained, and the 
 person made uneasy. The state, therefore, into which 
 every joint most naturally falls, especially when we are 
 asleep, is nearly in the middle, between the extremes 
 of motion; by which means all the muscles and liga¬ 
 ments are equally relaxed. Thence it is, that com¬ 
 monly, and naturally, the Teeth of the two Jaws are 
 not in contact; nor are the Condyles of the Lower Jaw 
 so far back in the Temporal Cavities as they can go. 
 
 -ob t1 ni yimoDon od Iff// il sibbxm zft oi tt 
 
 -lib srb rri eft ot doss lo nobqhog 
 
 
 
 
 
 snortfifrttt Jnoioi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T r 
 
 
 T £ . . £ 
 
 
 
 
 IfjSff 
 
 g i boolPioDnii 
 
 WR 
 
 OF 
 
 
TILL 
 
 \mt 
 
 ad} 
 
 OF THE 
 
 MUSCLES of the LOWER JAW. 
 
 343 ill 
 
 TT 
 
 11AVING described the figure Articulation, Motion, 
 and use of the Lower Jaw, it will be necessary, in 
 the next place, to give some account of the Muscles that 
 are the causes of its motion. 
 
 mriw,V£>o 
 
 
 
 There are five pair of Muscles, each of them capable 
 of producing various motions, according to the situa¬ 
 tion of the Lower Jaw, whether they act singly, or in 
 conjunction with others ; and two or more of them 
 may be so situated as to be capable of moving the Jaw 
 in the same direction ; and every motion is produced by 
 the action of more than one Muscle at a time. Thus, 
 if the Jaw is depressed, and brought to one side, either 
 the Masseter, Temporal, or Pterigoidaeus internus of 
 the opposite side will not only raise the Jaw, but bring 
 it to its middle state. It will be necessary, in the de¬ 
 scription of each Muscle, to give its use in the dif¬ 
 ferent situations of the Jaw; by which means, after they 
 are all described, their compound actions will be better 
 understood. I shall first describe those which raise the 
 Jaw ; then those which give it the lateral motion ; and, 
 
 lastly,, 
 
16 
 
 OF THE MUSCLES 
 
 V 
 
 lastly, those which depress it; proceeding in each class 
 as they rise in dissection. 
 
 The most superficial is the Masseter : it is situated 
 upon the posterior and lower part of the Face, between 
 the cheek-bone and angle of the Lower Jaw, directly 
 before the lower part of the Ear. It is a thick, short 
 complex Muscle, and a little flattened; it appears to 
 have two distinct origins, an anterior outer, and a pos¬ 
 terior inner ; but that is owing only to its outer edge 
 at its origin being slit, or double ; and the fibres of 
 these two edges having a different course, decussating 
 each other a little. The anterior and outer portion 
 of the Muscle begin to rise from a small part of the 
 lower edge of the Malar Process of the Maxillary Bone, 
 adjoining to the Os Malae, and continues its origin 
 all along the lower horizontal edge of this last bone, 
 to the angle where its Zygomatic Process turns up to 
 join that of the Temporal Bone. The external layer of 
 fibres in this portion are tendinous at their beginnings, 
 while the internal are fleshy. 
 
 The posterior and inner portion of this Muscle 
 begins to rise partly tendinous, and partly fleshy, from 
 the same lower edge of the Os Maloe; not where the 
 origin of the other portion terminates, but a little 
 farther forwards; and this origin is continued along 
 
 the 
 
 <l ' ' V # J 
 
 / 
 
17 
 
 OF THE LOWEk JAW. 
 
 *the lower edge of the Zygomatic Process of the Tem¬ 
 poral Bone, as far backwards as the eminence belong¬ 
 ing to the articulation of the Lower Jaw. 
 
 From this extent of its origin, the Muscle passes 
 downwards to its insertion into the Lower Jaw. The 
 anterior external portion is broader at its insertion 
 
 than at its origin; for it occupies a triangular space of 
 
 ♦ 
 
 the Lower Jaw above the angle, and on the outside, of 
 about an inch in size, to about an inch and a half 
 from the angle towards the Chin. In consequence of 
 this extent of insertion, the fibres of this portion diva¬ 
 ricate very considerably. They are mostly fleshy at 
 their insertion, a few only being tendinous, particu¬ 
 larly those that are inserted backwards. The posterior 
 and inner portion of the Masseter is narrower at its in¬ 
 sertion than at its origin ; its, posterior fibres running for¬ 
 wards as well as downwards, while its anterior run 
 almost directly downwards. It occupies, in its inser¬ 
 tion* the remaining part of the scabrous surface, above 
 the angle of the Lower Jaw, which lies between the 
 anterior portion and the two upper processes, viz. the 
 Condyle and Coronoide. As the anterior fibres of this 
 portion rise on the inside of the posterior fibres of the 
 other portion ; and as its posterior fibres run forwards 
 as well as downwards, and its anterior run almost 
 directly downwards, while the fibres of the other por¬ 
 tion 
 
IS 
 
 
 OF THE MUSCLES, &c. 
 
 tion radiate both forwards and backwards; these two 
 portions in some measure decussate or cross one an¬ 
 other. The anterior fibres, which run farthest and 
 lowest down, are tendinous at their insertion, while 
 the posterior and shortest are fleshy. 
 
 The use of the whole Muscle is to raise the Lower 
 Jaw; and when it is brought forwards, the posterior 
 and inner portion will assist in bringing it a little 
 back; so that this Muscle becomes a rotator, if the 
 [aw happens to be turned to the opposite side. 
 
 We may observe, that this Muscle is intermixed with 
 a number of tendinous portions, both at its origin and 
 its insertion; which give rise to a greater number of 
 fleshy fibres, and thereby add to the strength of the 
 Muscle. 
 
 TEMPORALIS 
 
* 
 
 T EMPORALI S. 
 
 It is situated on the side of the Head, above, and 
 somewhat before the Ear. It is a very pretty broad, flat, 
 and radiated Muscle ; broad and thin at its origin ; 
 narrow and thick at its insertion; and is covered with 
 a pretty strong Fascia, above the Jugum. 
 
 t a . r» , - 
 
 This Fascia is fixed to the bones round the whole 
 circumference of the origin of the Muscle. Above, it is 
 fixed to a smooth white line, that is observable upon 
 the Skull, extending from a little ridge on the lateral 
 part of the Os Frontis, continued across the Parietal 
 Bone, and making a turn towards the Mammillary Pro¬ 
 cess. It is fixed below, to the ridge where the Zygo¬ 
 matic Process begins, just above the Meatus Auditorius; 
 then to the upper edge of the Zygomatic Process itself, 
 and anteriorly to the Os Make. This adhesion, ante¬ 
 riorly, above, and posteriorly, gives, as it were, the 
 circumference of the origin of the Temporal Muscle. 
 
 r 
 
 This Muscle arises from all the bones of the side of the 
 Head, that are within the line, for insertion of the ten¬ 
 dinous Fascia, viz. from the lower and lateral part of 
 the Parietal Bone, from all the squammous portion of 
 
 D * the 
 
£0 
 
 'T E M PORALI S. 
 
 the Temporal Bone, from the lower and lateral part 
 of the Os Frontis, from all the Temporal Process of 
 the Os Sphenoides, and often from a process at the 
 lower part of this surface (which portion, however, is 
 often common to this Muscle, and the Pterygoidasus 
 externus), and from the posterior surface of the Os 
 Malae. Outwardly, it rises from the inner surface of the 
 Jugum, and from the whole inner surface of the Fascia 
 above described. At this origin, from the Jugum, it is 
 not to be distinguished from the Masseter, being there, 
 in fact, one and the same Muscle; and indeed the 
 Masseter is no more than a continuation of the same 
 origin, under the edge of the Jugum; and might 
 properly enough be reckoned the same, both as to its 
 origin and insertion, and in some measure in its use 
 also. 
 
 The origin is principally fleshy ; and the Muscle 
 passes from it, in general, downwards, and a little 
 forwards, converging, and forming a thin middle ten¬ 
 don. After which the Muscle runs downwards, on 
 the inside of the Jugum, and is inserted into the Co- 
 ronoid Process of the Lower Jaw, on both sides tendi¬ 
 nous and fleshy, but principally tendinous. It reaches 
 farther down upon the inside of the Coronoid Process 
 than upon the outer side, where the insertion is con¬ 
 tinued as low as the body of the bone. 
 
 The 
 
TEMPORALIS. 
 
 G 1 
 ^ 1 
 
 The posterior and inferior edge of this Muscle 
 passes over the root of the Zygomatic Process of 
 the Temporal Bone, as over a pulley, which con¬ 
 fines the action of the Muscle to that of raising the 
 Lower Jaw, more than if its fibres had passed in a 
 direct course from their origin to their insertion. 
 
 V 4 ' j . T «v » * f f ,\ J- . » 
 
 The use of the Temporal Muscle, in general, is to 
 raise the Lower Jaw ; and as it passes a little forwards 
 to its insertion, it must bring the Condyle at the same 
 time backwards, and so counteract the Pterygoidasus 
 externus of the opposite side: and if both Muscles act, 
 they counteract both the Pterygoidaei, by bringing Jpack 
 the whole of the Jaw. 
 
 
 ■% 
 
 Ol 80013 
 
 ;3rbi^n A 
 
 do*i ^ bion 
 
 -nfco zi nofttogr 
 
 X onrj 
 
 i ; 
 
 .« i (if. 
 
 1 k V ^ V '■* 
 
 01 
 
 t rv* 
 
 D 2 
 
 PTERY- 
 
PTERYGOIDiEUS INTERNUS. 
 
 It is situated upon the inside of the Lower Jaw, oppo¬ 
 site to the Masseter, which is upon the outside. It 
 is a strong short Muscle, a little flattened, especially 
 at its insertion. It arises tendinous and fleshy from 
 the whole internal surface of the external Ala of the 
 Sphenoid Bone ; from the external surface of the internal 
 Ala, near its bottom; from that process of the Os Palati 
 that makes part of the Fossa Pterygoidasa; likewise from 
 the anterior rounded surface of that process, where it is 
 connected to the Os Maxillare superius. From thence 
 the Muscle passes downwards, a little outwards and 
 backwards, and is inserted tendinous and fleshy into 
 the inside of the Lower Jaw, from the angle up 
 almost to the groove, for the admission of the Maxil¬ 
 lary Nerve, where the surface of the bone is remark¬ 
 ably scabrous. 
 
 The use of this Muscle is to raise the Lower Jaw ; 
 and from its direction, one would suspect that it would 
 bring the Condyle a little forwards -> but this motion 
 is contrary to that of the Lower Jaw, for it is natu¬ 
 rally brought back when raised. 
 
 PTERY- 
 
PTE R Y G OI DiE U S EXTERNUS, 
 
 situated immediately between the external surface 
 of the external Ala of the Pterygoid Process, and the 
 Condyle of the Lower Jaw ; lying, as it were, ho¬ 
 rizontally along the basis of the Skull. It is some¬ 
 what radiated in some bodies; broad at the origin, and 
 small at the insertion ; but the greater part of it forms a 
 round, strong, fleshy belly ; so that the part that makes 
 it of the radiated kind is thin. 
 
 The thick and ordinary portion of it arises tendinous 
 and fleshy, from almost the whole external surface of the 
 external Ala of the Pterygoid Process of the Sphenoid Bone, 
 excepting a little bit of the root at the posterior edge; 
 and towards the lower part, it arises a little from the 
 inner surface of that Ala. The thin portion arises 
 from a ridge of the Sphenoid, that is continued from 
 the process towards the Temple, just behind the Fora¬ 
 men Lacerum inferius, which terminates in a little 
 protuberance. This origin is sometimes wanting; 
 and in that case, the Temporal Muscle arises from that 
 protuberance ; and very often this origin is common 
 to both. These two origins of this Muscle are some¬ 
 times so much separated as to make it a Biceps. 
 
 From 
 
u PTERYGOIDiEUS EXTERNUS, 
 
 From these origins the Muscle passes outwards, and a 
 little backwards, converging; that is, the superior fibres 
 passing outwards and backwards, and a little down¬ 
 wards, while the inferior, or larger portion of it, passes 
 a little upward. 
 
 It is inserted tendinous and fleshy into a depression 
 on the anterior part of the Condyle and neck of the 
 Lower Jaw, upon the inside of that ridge, which is con¬ 
 tinued from the Coronoid Process. Likewise a little 
 portion into the anterior part of the moveable car¬ 
 tilage. A little portion is likewise inserted into the 
 anterior part of the moveable cartilage of the joint. 
 
 When this Muscle acts singly, it is a rotator; for it 
 brings the Condyle of the Jaw forwards, and likewise 
 the moveable cartilage, which throws the Chin to the 
 opposite side: but if it ads in conjunction with its 
 fellow of the opposite side, instead of being turned to 
 one side, the whole Jaw is brought forwards, and 
 thus these counteract the Temporal, Sec. 
 
 J . V- 4 . v * y T 
 
 These two Muscles generally act alternately; and when 
 they do so, one acts at the time of depression, the other 
 at the time of elevation ; so that these Muscles act, both 
 when the Lower Jaw is raised, and when it is depressed : 
 yet they do not assist either in raising or depressing it. 
 
 DIGAS- 
 
I 
 
 DIGASTRICUS. 
 
 It is situated immediately under, and a little upon 
 the inside of the Lower Jaw, and outside of the 
 Fauces, extending from the Mastoid Process to the 
 Chin, nearly along the angle made by the Neck and 
 Chin, or Face *. The name of this Muscle expresses 
 its general shape, as it has two fleshy bellies, and 
 of course a middle tendon. Yet some of its anterior 
 belly does not arise from the tendon of the posterior, 
 but from the Fascia, which binds it to the Os 
 Hyoides. These two fleshy bellies do not run in the 
 same line, but form an angle, just where the tendon 
 runs into the anterior belly ; so that this tendon seems 
 rather to belong to the posterior, which is the thickest 
 and longest. 
 
 This Muscle arises from the Sulcus made by the in-< 
 side of the Mastoid Process, and a ridge upon the Tem¬ 
 poral Bone, where it is united with the Os Occipitis, 
 The extent of this origin is about an inch: it is fleshy 
 upon its outer part, viz. that from the Mastoid Process, 
 
 and tendinous on the inside from the ridge. From its 
 
 origin 
 
 * Vide Plate II. E, F. 
 
origin it passes forwards, downwards, and a little in¬ 
 wards, much in the direction of the posterior edge of 
 the Mammillary Process; and forms a round tendon 
 first in its centre and upper surface. This tendon 
 passes on in the same direction; and when got near 
 the Os Hyoides, it commonly perforates the ante¬ 
 rior end of the Stylo-Hyoidseus Muscle ; and from the 
 lower edge of this tendon, some fibres seem to go 
 off, which degenerate into a kind of Fascia, that 
 binds it to the Os Hyoides; and some of it goes across 
 the lower part of the Mylo-Hyoidseus, and joins its fellow 
 on the opposite side, binding the Os Hyoides by a 
 kind of belt. At this part the tendon becomes a 
 little broader, makes a turn upwards, inwards, and 
 forwards, and gives origin to the anterior belly, 1 which 
 passes on in the same direction, to the lower part of 
 the Chin, where it is inserted tendinous and fleshy, 
 into a slight depression on the under, and a little on 
 the posterior part of the Lower Jaw, almost contiguous 
 to its fellow. Besides the attachment of the middle 
 tendon to the Os Hyoides, there is a ligamentous 
 binding, which serves, in some measure, as a pulley. 
 This is more marked in some subjects than in others; 
 and this depends on the strength of the tendinous ex¬ 
 pansion, which binds the tendon of the Digastricus to 
 the Os Hyoides. 
 
 When 
 
DIGASTRICUS. 
 
 £7 
 
 When we say that these parts are attached to the 
 Os Hyoides, we do not mean that they can be traced 
 quite into it, like some other tendons in the body; but 
 the Os Hyoides seems to be the most fixed point of 
 attachment. Very often we find two anterior bellies to 
 each Muscle ; the uncommon one, which is the smallest, 
 does not pass to the Chin, but joins with a similar 
 portion of the other side, in a • middle tendon, which 
 is often fixed to the Os Hyoides 1 At other times, we' 
 find such a portion on one side only ; in which case it 
 is commonly fixed to the middle tendon of the Mylo- 
 Hyoidaeus. 
 
 The use of these Muscles with regard to the Lower- 
 Jaw, is principally to depress it; but according as one 
 ads a little more forcibly than the other, it thereby 
 gives the Jaw a small rotation; and becomes, in that 
 respect, a kind of antagonist to the Pterygoidaeus Exter- 
 nus. Besides depressing the Lower Jaw, when we 
 examine the dead body, they would appear to raise 
 the Larynx. But, although they have this effect, a 
 proper attention to what happens in the living body, 
 will probably fhew, that their principal action is to 
 depress the Lower Jaw, and that they ate the Muscles 
 which are commonly employed for this purpose. Let 
 a finger be placed on the upper part of the Sterno- 
 Mastoidaeus Muscle, just behind the posterior edge of 
 
 E ' the 
 
£3 
 
 D1GASTRICUS. 
 
 the Mastoid Process, about its middle, touching that 
 edge a little with the finger ; then depress the Lower 
 Jaw, and the posterior head of the Digastric will be felt 
 to swell very considerably, and so as to point out the 
 direction of the Muscle. In this there can be no de¬ 
 ception ; for there is no other Muscle in this part that 
 has the same direction ; and those who are of opinion 
 that the Digastric does not depress the Lower Jaw, will 
 more readily allow this, when they are told, that we 
 find the same head of the Muscle act in deglutition > 
 but riot with a force equal to that which it exerts in 
 depressing the Lower Jaw. Further, if the Sterno- 
 Hyoidaei, Sterno-Thyroidaei, and Costo-Hyoidsei, act¬ 
 ing at the same time with the Mylo-Hyoid^i, and 
 Genio-Hyoidaei, assisted in depressing the Jaw, the Os 
 Hyoides, and Thyroide Cartilage, would probably be de¬ 
 pressed, as the bellies of the Sterno-Hyoidoei, and of the 
 other lower muscles, are by much the longest; but, on 
 the contrary, we find that the Os Hyoides, with the 
 Thyroide Cartilage, is a little raised in the depression of 
 the Jaw, which we may suppose to be done by the anterior 
 belly of the Digastric: and secondly, if these Muscles 
 were to act to bring about this motion of the Jaw, these 
 parts would be brought forwards, nearer to the straight 
 line between the Chin and Sternum, which is not the 
 case in this action; whereas we find it to be the case 
 in deglutition, in which these evidently act. By apply- 
 
 i. Ml 'tduoitmq ing 
 
 v . ' 
 
DIGASTRICUS. 
 
 29 
 
 4 
 
 ing our fingers upon the Genio-Hyoidaeus, and Mylo- 
 Hyoidasus, near the Os Hyoides, between the two an¬ 
 terior bellies of the Digastric (not near the Chin, 
 where the action of these two bellies may occasion a 
 mistake), we find these Muscles quite flaccid ; which is 
 not-the case in deglutition, nor in speaking, in which 
 they certainly do act; nor do we find the Muscles under 
 the Os Hyoides at all affected, as they are in the motion 
 of the Larynx. 
 
 It has been observed* that when we open the mouth* 
 while we keep the Lower Jaw fixed, the fore part of the 
 Head or Face is necessarily raised. Authors have been 
 at a good deal of pains to explain this. Some of them 
 considered" the Condyles of the Jaw as the centre of 
 motion ; but if this were the case, that part of the 
 Head, where it articulates with the Spine, and of con¬ 
 sequence the whole body, must be depressed, in pro¬ 
 portion as the Upper Jaw is raised ; which is not true in 
 fact. Others have considered the Condyles of the 
 Occiput as the centre of motion ; and they have con¬ 
 ceived the Extensor Muscles of the Head to be the 
 moving powers. The Muscles which move the Head 
 in this case, are pointed out by two circumstances, 
 which attend all muscular motion: in the first place, 
 all actions of our body have Muscles immediately 
 adapted to them ; and secondly, when the mind wills 
 any particular action, its power is applied by instinct 
 
 E 2 to 
 
30 
 
 DI G ASTRICUS. 
 
 / 
 
 to those Muscles only, which are naturally adapted to 
 that motion ; ahd further, the mind being accustomed 
 to see the part move which is naturally the most 
 moveable, attends*, to its motion in the volition, 
 although it be in that instance fixed, and the other 
 parts of the body move towards it; and although*the 
 other parts of the body might be brought towards it 
 by other Muscles, and would be so, if the mind in¬ 
 tended that they should come towards it, yet these 
 Muscles are not brought into action. Thus the Flexors 
 of the Arm commonly move the hand to the body; 
 but if the hand be fixed, the body is moved by the 
 same Muscles to the hand. In this case, however, the 
 mind wills the motion of the hand towards the body, 
 and brings the Flexors into action ; whereas, if it wished 
 . to bring the body towards the hand, the Muscles of the 
 fore part of the body would be put into action, and this 
 would produce the same effect. 
 
 To apply this to the Lower Jaw ; when we attempt 
 to open the Mouth, while the Lower Jaw is immove¬ 
 able, we fix our attention upon the very same Muscles 
 (whatever they are) which we call into action, when, 
 we depress the Lower Jaw ; and we find that we act 
 with the very same Muscles; for our mind attends to. 
 the depressing of the Jhwy and not the raising of the 
 face ; and under such circumstances' the mouth' is 
 ' - ' - 7 actually 
 
 4 
 
DIG ASTRICUS. 
 
 31: 
 
 actually opened. We find then by these means the head 
 is raised; and the idea that vve have of this motion, is 
 the same that we have in the common depression of the 
 Jaw; and we should not know* except from Circum¬ 
 stances, that the Jaw was not really j depressed; . and 
 we find at this time too, that the Extensors of the head* 
 are not in action. On the contrary, when the Jaw i$ 
 fixed in the same situation, if we hav,e a mind ;td raise! 
 the head, or Upper Jaw, which of course (must open 
 the mouth, we fix our attention to the Muscles that 
 move the head backwards, without having they idea of 
 opening our mouth ; and at this time the Extensors of 
 the head act. This plainly shows, that the same Mus¬ 
 cles which depress the Jaw, when moveable, must raise 
 the head when the Jaw is kept fixed. 
 
 orb do gsIoauM 3ib <bxuul orb shit war ybod orb gand or 
 
 This is a proof, too, that there are no other Muscles 
 
 employed in depressing the Lower Jaw, than what will 
 raise the head under the circumstances mentioned. 
 
 This will further appear from the structure of the 
 parts, wherein four things are to be considered, viz. 
 the articulation of the Jaw;, the articulation of the 
 Head with the Neck ; the origin, and the insertion of 
 Digaftrie Muscle. :wfiT iowo J orb crmr. 
 
 i. 
 
 k r l • _f _ * / „ _r^ f • 
 
 oi zhmjju oiiirn iko 101 f am02 s'iov sru nvrw 
 
 * Suppose A, the Upper Jaw, to be fixed, and the. 
 
 Lower Jaw B, to be moveable on the Condyle C : if the 
 
 * Vide Plate II. 
 
 Digastric 
 
DIGA STRICUS. 
 
 S3 
 
 Digraftic contracts, its origin E, and insertion F, will 
 approach towards one another ; in which case it is evi¬ 
 dent, that the Lower Jaw will move downwards and 
 backwards. But if the Lower Jaw be fixed, as in the 
 case supposed, and the Vertebras GGG be also fixed, 
 the Condyle will move upwards and forwards upon 
 the eminence in the joint, the lore part of the head 
 will be pushed upwards and backwards by the Con¬ 
 dyle, and the hind part of the head will be drawn 
 down ; so that the whole shall make a kind of circu- 
 lar motion upon the upper Vertebrae ; and the Digaftric 
 Muscle pulling the hind part of the head towards the 
 Lower Jaw, and at the same time pushing up the Con¬ 
 dyles against the fore part of the head, acquires, 
 
 x t LhlL JLlhl V(j 0IT 
 
 by this mechanism, a very considerable additional 
 power. 
 
 lit) 
 
 \ 
 
OF THE 
 
 rjmf 
 
 STRUCTURE of a TOOTH, 
 
 And, First, of the ENAME L. 
 
 A TOOTH is composed of two substances, viz. 
 Enamel and Bone. The Enamel, called likewise the 
 vitreous or cortical part, is found only upon the 
 body of the Tooth, and is there laid all around, on 
 the outside of the bony'or internal substance*. It 
 is by far the hardest part of our body; insomuch that 
 the hardest and sharpest saw will scarcely make an 
 impression upon it, and we are obliged to use a file 
 in dividing or cutting it. When it is broken, it appears 
 
 fibrous or striated; and all the fibres or striae are directed 
 
 % « 
 
 from the circumference to the centre of the T ooth f . 
 
 This, in some measure, both prevents it from breaking 
 in mastication, as the fibres are disposed in arches, and 
 keeps the Tooth from wearing down, as the ends of the 
 fibres are always acting on the food. 
 
 *■* i . v ijAH- ■' ^ ie 
 
 * * ' 
 
 * Vide Plate XIV. Fig. 14, 15, and 17. 
 f Vide Plate XIV, Fig. 21, 22, and 23^ 
 
5* OF THE STRUCTURE 
 
 The Enamel is thickest on the grinding surface, and on 
 the cutting edges, or points, of the Teeth; and becomes 
 gradually thinner on the sides, as it approaches the 
 neck, where it terminates insensibly, though not equally 
 
 low, on all sides of the Teeth *. On the base or grind- 
 
 / 
 
 ing surface it is of a pretty equal thickness, and therefore 
 is of the same form with the bony substance which 
 it covers f. 
 
 It would seem to be an earth united with a portion of 
 animal substance, as it is not reducible to quick lime by 
 fire, till it has first been dissolved in an acid. When a 
 Tooth is put into a weak acid, the Enamel, to appearance, 
 is not hurt; but on touching it with the fingers, it crum¬ 
 bles down into a white pulp. The Enamel of Teeth, 
 exposed to any degree of heat, does not turn to lime: it 
 contains animal mucilaginous matter ; for* when exposed 
 to the fire, it becomes very brittle, cracks, grows black, 
 and separates from the inclosed bony part of the Tooth. 
 It is capable, however, of bearing a greater degree of 
 heat than the bony part, without becoming brittle and 
 black J. This substance has no marks of being vas¬ 
 cular 
 
 * Vide Plate XIV. Fig. 21 , 22, and 23. 
 
 f Vide ditto. 
 
 % From this circumstance we can shew the Enamel better by burning a Tooth, 
 as the bony part becomes black sooner than the Enamel. The Me,.hod of burning 
 and shewing them after they are burnt, is as follows.-^Let one half of a Tooth be 
 
 filed 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
OF) A TOOT H. 8J 
 
 eular, and oi having a circulation of fluids: the most 
 subtile injections we can make never reach it; it takes 
 no tinge from feeding with madder, even in the youngest 
 animals y and as was observed above, when soaked in a 
 gentle acid, there appears no gristly or fleshy part, with 
 which the earthy part had been incorporated *. 
 
 „ * > - • .. # •>. y -t ^ *4 
 
 We shall speak of the use and formation of the 
 Enamel hereafter, when they will be better understood. 
 
 1 . ^ ^ IT* /'I ^ 1^ | rtf/ Y CVA / 
 
 filed away, from one end to the other; then burnjt gently in the fire: after this is 
 done, waih the filed surface with an acid, or scrape it with a knife. By this 
 method you will clean the edge of the Enamel, which will remain white, and the 
 bony part will be found black. 
 
 —. f-j- v ■' rr 0-1 c~9 v" \ i £.~r> t £' f f ft, * • » ' ' . J N ■ • L. j t ’ ’ ’ \ t . ‘ 
 
 * In all these experiments I never could observe, that the Enamel was in the least 
 tinged, either in the growing or formed Tooth. This looks as if the Enamel were 
 the earth more fully depurated, or strained off from the common juices, in such a 
 manner as not to allow the gross particles of madder to pass. Here it may not be 
 amiss to remark, that the names given to animal substance, suth as Gluten, See. are 
 not in the least expressive of the thing meant; for there is no such thing as glue in 
 an animal, till it has either undergone a putrefactive process, or been changed by heat. 
 And here, too, I would be understood, that I call earth no part of an animal*, nor 
 does it make up any part of an animal substance. 
 
 OF 
 
 I 
 
OF THE BONY PART 
 
 3i) 
 
 OF THE 
 
 BONY PART of a TOOTH. 
 
 HE other substance of which a Tooth is com- 
 posed, is bony; but much harder than the most 
 compact part of bones in general. This substance 
 makes the interior part of the body, the neck, and the 
 whole of the root of a Tooth. It is a mixture of two 
 
 ^ * A 0 jL jj> JL U V J VJII 3 J JL> HmJ j 
 
 substances, viz. calcareous earth and an animal substance, 
 which we might suppose to be organized and vascular. 
 The earth is in very considerable quantity; it remains 
 of the .same shape after calcination, so that it is in some 
 measure kept together by cohesion ; and it is capable of 
 being extracted by steeping in the muriatic, and some 
 other acids. The animal substance, when deprived of 
 the earthy part, by steeping in an acid, is more com¬ 
 pact than the same substance in other bones, but still is 
 soft and. flexible. 
 
 * 
 
 
 That part of a Tooth which is bony, is nearly of the 
 same form as a complete Tooth ; and thence, when the 
 Enamel is removed, it has the same sort of edge, point, 
 or points, as when the Enamel remained. We cannot 
 by injection prove that the bony part of a Tooth is 
 
 vascular ; 
 
37 
 
 OF A TOOTH. 
 
 vascular : but from some circumstances it would appear 
 that it is so ; for the fangs of Teeth are liable to swel¬ 
 lings, seemingly of the spina ventosa kind, like other 
 bones; and they sometimes anchylose with the socket, 
 by bony and inflexible continuity, as all other conti¬ 
 guous bones are apt to do. But there may be a deception 
 here; for the swelling may be an original formation, 
 and the anchylosis may be from the pulp that the Tooth 
 is formed upon being united with the socket. The fol¬ 
 lowing considerations would seem to shew that the 
 Teeth are not vascular :—First, I never saw them injected 
 in any preparation, nor could I ever succeed in any 
 attempt to inject them, either in young or old subjects ; 
 and therefore believe that there must have been some 
 fallacy in the cases where they have been said to be 
 injected—secondly, we are not able to trace any vessels 
 going from the pulp into the substance of the new formed 
 Tooth; and whatever part of a Tooth is formed, it is 
 always completely formed ; which is not the case with 
 other bones. But what is a more convincing proof, is 
 reasoning from the analogy between them and other 
 bones, when the animal has been fed with madder. 
 Take a young animal, viz. a pig, and feed it with mad¬ 
 der for three or four weeks ; then kill the animal, and, 
 upon examination-, you will find the following appear¬ 
 ance : first, if this animal had some parts of its Teeth 
 formed before the feeding with madder, those parts will 
 
 F 2 be 
 
OF THE BONY PART 
 
 $3 
 
 be known by their remaining or this natural colour;, 
 but such parts of the Teeth as were formed while the 
 animal was taking the madder, will be found to be of a 
 red colour. This shews, that it is only those parts that 
 were forming while the animal was taking the madder,, 
 that are dyed ; for what were already formed will not 
 be found in the leaft tinged. This is different in all other 
 bones; for we know that any part of a bone which is 
 already formed, is capable of being dyed with madder, 
 though net so fast as the part that is forming ; there¬ 
 fore, as we know that all other bones when formed are 
 vascular, and are thence susceptible of the dye, we may 
 readily suppose that the Teeth are not vascular, because 
 they are not susceptible of it after being once formed* 
 But we shall carry this still farther; if you feed a pig 
 with madder for some time, and then leave it off for a 
 considerable time before you kill the animal, you will 
 find the above appearances still subsisting, with this ad¬ 
 dition, that all the parts of the Teeth which were formed, 
 after leaving off feeding with the madder, will be white. 
 Here then in some Teeth we shall have white, then red, 
 and then white again ^ and so we shall have the red and 
 the white colour alternately through the whole Tooth. 
 
 This experiment shews, that the Tooth once tinged, 
 does not lose its colour ; now, as all other bones that 
 have been once tinged lose their colour in time, when 
 
 the 
 
OF A TOO T H. 
 
 S;> 
 
 the animal leaves off feeding with madder (though 
 very slowly), and as that dye must be taken into the 
 constitution by the absorbents, it would seem that the 
 Teeth are without absorbents, as well as other vessels, 
 mbbfcfil Ol’ j r 'flirf 3 9t-v/ At* ... ( \ 
 
 This shews that the growth of the Teeth is very 
 different from that of other bones. Bones begin at a 
 point, and shoot out at their surface; and the part that 
 seems already formed, is not in reality so ; for it is 
 forming every day by having new matter thrown into 
 it, till the whole substance is comnlete; and even then 
 it is constantly changing its matter. 
 
 Another circumstance in which Teeth seem different 
 from bone, and a strong circumstance in support of 
 their having no circulation in them, is, that they never 
 change by age, and seem never to undergo any alteration, 
 when completely formed, but by abrasion ; they do not 
 grow softer, like the other bones, as we find in some 
 cases, where the whole earthy matter of the bones has 
 been taken into the constitution. 
 
 From these experiments it would appear, that the 
 Teeth are to be considered as extraneous bodies, with 
 respect to a circulation through their substance; but 
 they have most certainly a living principle, by which 
 means they make part of the body, and are capable of 
 
 uniting 
 
40 
 
 OF THE BONY PART, &c 
 
 uniting with any part of a living body; as will be 
 
 explained hereafter: and it is to be observed, that 
 affections of the whole body have less influence upon 
 the Teeth than any other part of the body. Thus, in 
 children affected with the rickets, the Teeth grow 
 equally well as in health, though all the other bones 
 are much affected ; and hence their Teeth being of a 
 larger size in proportion to the other parts, their mouths 
 are protuberant. 
 
 Mo 
 
 'OoT 
 
 
 J J 
 
 
 rrrmT/^ 
 
 j't-Jooi 3to i 
 
 V V 
 
 on si ylr/cD aid 
 
 iaV 
 
 A 
 
 OF 
 
r't r 
 
 OF THE 
 
 CAVITY OF THE TEETH, 
 
 1 •» T9 ‘\ f . 't’j ' r T r - " . „ y . ... * '' ' . **.■'.'? 
 
 to' t j w t f3in j ^v<*n»/i $ kji ^ 
 
 t f 1 | I* J f\ fY IT || i x 1 f f . j | T » ’Jjl j 1 J J V , v 1 \ 5 l J i • /1 J ^ / 4 \ * Jf X Jl. -«/ «\ Jl v* i' ' j * m *. 
 
 Every Tooth has an internal Cavity, which ex¬ 
 tends nearly the whole length of its bony part.* * * § It 
 opens, or begins at the point of the fang, where it is 
 small; but in its passage becomes larger, and ends in 
 the body of the Toothf. This end is exactly of the 
 shape of the body of the Tooth to which it belongs. 
 In general it may be said, that the whole of the Cavity 
 is nearly of the shape of the Tooth itself, larger in the 
 body of the Tooth, and thence gradually smaller to the 
 extremity of the fang; simple, where the Tooth has 
 but one rootf; and in the same manner compounded, 
 when the Tooth has two or more fangs §. 
 
 This Cavity is not cellular, but smooth in its surface: 
 it contains no marrow, but appears to be filled with 
 
 blood- 
 
 * Vide Plate XIV. Fig. I, 2, 3, &c. 
 
 f Vide Plate XIV. Fig. i 5 2, 3, &c. 
 
 X Vide Plate XIV. Fig. 3, 4, 5, and 6, 
 
 § Vide Plate XIV, Fig. 1, 
 
 4 
 
43 OF THE CAVITY OF THE TEETH, 
 
 - blood-vessels*, and, I suppose, nerves, united by a 
 pulpy or cellular substance. The vessels are branches 
 of the superior and inferior Maxillanes ; and the nerves 
 must come from the second and third branches of the 
 fifth pair. 
 
 By injections we can trace the blood-vessels distinctly 
 through the whole Cavity of the Tooth; but I could 
 never trace the Nerves distinctly even to the beginning 
 of the Cavity, 
 
 * Vide Plate XII. Fig. 7, 8. 
 
 
 OF 
 
OF THE 
 
 - ■ ' ■ - £ . 1 ’’ 
 
 PERIOSTEUM of the TEETH. 
 
 rip 
 
 X FIE Teeth, as we observed, are covered by an 
 Enamel only at their bodies ; but at their fangs 
 they have a Periosteum, which, though very thin, is 
 vascular, and appears to be common to the Tooth which 
 it incloses, and the socket, which it lines as an invest¬ 
 ing internal membrane. It covers the Tooth a little 
 beyond the bony socket, and is there attached to the 
 Gum. 
 
 G 
 
 OF 
 
OF THE SITUATION 
 
 U 
 
 OF THE 
 
 SITUATION of the TEETH. 
 
 HE general shape and situation of the Teeth are 
 obvious. The opposition of those of the two Jaws, 
 and the circle which each row describes, need not be 
 particularly explained, as they may be very well seen 
 in the living body, and may be supposed to be already 
 
 understood, from what was said of the Alveolar 
 
 * • , . 
 
 Processes. 
 
 i • 
 
 We may just observe, with regard to the situation of 
 the two rows, that when they are in the most natural 
 state of contact, the Teeth of the Upper Jaw project a 
 little beyond the lower Teeth, even at the sides of the 
 Jaws; but still more remarkably at the fore part, where, 
 in most people, the upper Teeth lie before those of the 
 Lower Jaw*: and at the lateral part of each row, the 
 line, or surface of contact, is hollow from behind 
 forwards, in the Lower Jaw ; and in the same propor¬ 
 tion it is convex in the Upper Jawf. 
 
 The 
 
 * Vide Plate III. Fig. i, 2. 
 f Vide Plate Ill. Fig. i, 2. 
 
 ( 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 4<J 
 
 The edged each row is single at the fore part of the 
 [aws; but as the Teeth grow thicker backwards, it 
 there splits into an internal and external edge. The 
 canine Tooth, which we shall call Cuspidatus , is the 
 point from which the two edges go off; so that the 
 first grinder, or what we shall call the first Bicuspis , is 
 the first Tooth that has a double edge 
 
 * Vide Plate IV. Fig. 2» 
 
 ■Lr 
 
 Ji 
 
 *4 
 
 . 
 
 ' .'Cl ! i t 
 
 
 
 G 2 
 
 OF 
 

 OF THE 
 
 NUMBER of TEETH. 
 
 Tl HEIR Number in the whole, at full maturity, is 
 from twenty-eight to thirty-two : I once saw twenty- 
 seven only ; never more than thirty-two. Fourteen 
 of them are placed in each Jaw, when the whole 
 number is no more than twenty-eight ; and sixteen, 
 when there are thirty-two. If the whole be twenty- 
 nine or thirty-one in number, the Upper Jaw some¬ 
 times, and sometimes the Lower, has one more than 
 the other ; and when the number is thirty, I find them 
 sometimes divided equally between the two Jaws ; and 
 in other subjects sixteen of them are in one Jaw, and 
 fourteen in the other. In speaking of the Number of 
 Teeth, I am supposing that none of them have been 
 pulled out, or otherwise lost; but that there are from 
 eight to twelve of those large posterior Teeth, which 
 I call Grinders, and that they are so closely planted as 
 to make a continuity in the circle : and in this case, 
 when the number is less than thirty-two, the deficiency 
 is in the last grinder* 
 
 ye- v v v*' , I'w-M ?i ritscj }2orn sdt 
 
 The Teeth differ very much in figure from one ano¬ 
 ther ; but those on the right side in each Jaw resemble 
 
 exactly 
 
OF THE NUMBER OF TEETH. 47 
 
 exactly those on the left, so as to be In pairs; and the 
 pairs belonging to the Upper Jaw nearly resemble the 
 corresponding Teeth of the Lower Jaw in situation, 
 figure, and use*. 
 
 Each Tooth is divided into two parts, viz. first, the 
 body, or that part of it which is the thickest, and 
 stands bare beyond the Alveoli and Gums ; secondly, 
 the fang, or root, which is lodged within the Gum 
 and Alveolar Process : and the boundary between 
 these two parts, which is grasped by the edge of the 
 Gum, is called the Neck of a Tooth. The bodies of 
 the different Teeth differ very much in shape and size, 
 and so do their roots. The difference must be considered 
 hereafter. 
 
 The Teeth of each Jaw are commonly divided 
 into three classes, viz. Incisors y Canbie y and Grmders ; 
 but from considering some circumstances of their form, 
 growth, and use, I choose to divide them into the four 
 following classes, viz. Incisores y commonly called Fore 
 Teeth ; Cuspidati y vulgarly called Canine\ Bicuspides , or 
 the two first Grinders ; and Molares y or the three last 
 Teeth. The number of each class, in each Jaw, for 
 the most part, is four Incisores y two Cuspidati y four Bi¬ 
 cuspides y and four, five, or fix Molares. 
 
 There 
 
 * Vide Plate III. IV. V. 
 
4S 
 
 OF THE NUMBER OF TEETH-, 
 
 There is a regular gradation, both in growth and 
 form, through these classes, from the Inchores to the 
 Molares , in which respect the Cuspidati are of a middle 
 nature, between the Incisores and Bicuspides , as the last 
 are between the Cuspidati and Molares ; and thence the 
 Incisores and Molares are the most unlike in every 
 circumstance^jv 
 
 OF 
 
 ,1 . , . ,. . i 
 
 Ji . J , f Jl‘ UJJ}^ - U -> •' *!•-.»Jaw 3 SVH1 c • 4-1JU’ 
 
 * Vide Plate III. and V. 
 
 * -T; < 
 
 f It is here to be understood, that the Teeth from which we take our description, 
 are such as are just completely formed, and therefore not i'n the least worn down by 
 mastication. Our description of each f class is taken from the Lower Jaw; and the 
 difference between them and thetr corresponding classes in the Upper, immediately 
 follows that description. 
 
 
 y 
 
 \ 
 

 * ■ . /i 
 
 jj u 
 
 OF THE 
 
 INCISORES. 
 
 Th E Incisores are situated in the anterior part of the 
 Jaw; the others more backwards on each side, in the 
 order in which we have named them. The bodies of the 
 Incisores are broad, having two flat surfaces, one ante¬ 
 rior, the other posterior. These surfaces meet in a sharp 
 cutting edge. The anterior surface is convex in every 
 direction, and placed almost perpendicularly; and the 
 posterior is concave and sloping, so that the cutting 
 
 edge is almost directly over the anterior surface 
 
 \ 
 
 These surfaces are broadest and the Tooth is thinnest 
 at the cutting edge, or end of the Tooth, and thence 
 they become gradually narrower and the tooth thicker 
 towards the neck, where the surfaces are continued to 
 the narrowest side, or edge of the fang. The body of 
 an Incisor , in a side-view, grows gradually thicker, or 
 broader, from the edge or end of the Tooth to its neck ; 
 and these coincide with the flat or broad side of the 
 fang; so that when we look on the fore part, or on the 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 * Vide Plate XIV. and Plate V. row 3,4. 
 
50 
 
 Jr 
 
 OF THE INCISORES, 
 
 back part of an Incisor , we observe it grows, constantly 
 narrower from its cutting edge to the extremity of its 
 fang. But in a side-view it is thickest or broadest at its 
 neck, and thence becomes gradually more narrow, both 
 to its cutting edge, and to the point of its fang *. 
 
 The Enamel is continued farther down, and is thicker 
 on the anterior and back part of the Incisores than on their 
 sides, and is even a little thicker on the fore part than 
 upon the back part of the Tooth. If we view them late¬ 
 rally, either when entire, or when cut down through the 
 middle, but especially in the latter case, it would seem 
 as if the fang was driven like a wedge into, and had 
 split the body or Enamel of the Tooth f. They stand 
 almost perpendicularly* their bodies being turned a little 
 forwards. Their fangs are much shorter than those of 
 the Cuspidati , but pretty much of the same length with 
 all the other Teeth of this JawJ. 
 
 In the Upper Jaw they are broader and thicker, espe¬ 
 cially the two first: their length is nearly the same 
 with those of the Lower Jaw. They stand a little 
 obliquely, with their bodies turned much more forwards 
 (the first especially), and they generally fall over those 
 of the Under Jaw. 
 
 The 
 
 * Vide Plate V. 
 
 f Vide Plate XIV. Fig. j;. 
 
 | Vide Plate III. Fig. 2. 
 
OF THE INCISORES. 
 
 51 
 
 The two first Incisores cover the two first, and half of 
 the second of the Lower Jaw; so that the second Incisor 
 in the Upper Jaw covers more than half of the second, 
 and more than the half of the Cuspidatus of the Under 
 Jaw 
 
 The edges of the Incisores , by use and friction, in some 
 people, become blunt and thicker; and in others they 
 sharpen one another, and become thinner. 
 
 * Vide Plate III* Fig u 
 
 i * H • 
 
m 
 
 * <l’ I<> ej'Ksq [fomei 3jii !l 'JU .. ^.iSViV. LiS. 
 
 ; *vi(filuojtorjqi. ] hn$in „\am. ^c^wy.-X am -Jq ,- 
 
 nfitil 9bii3 3 fb'- Hi J«o. cwiljxi ,ua < n-^a q 
 
 ■ iV^v. 
 
 OF TIIE 
 
 CUSPIDATUS, 
 
 vino m$fft m bar,- rn y/jyj$jlni r i, - : 
 
 : . 
 
 rn 
 
 A HE Cuspidal us is the next after the Incisores in each 
 Jaw; so that there are four of them in all. They 
 are in general thicker than the Incisores, and consider¬ 
 ably the longest of all the Teeth*. 
 
 T^ift • -*i ‘I't f f f' T^n* > -} / v r\p# . iTvro l ^. 
 
 The shape of the body of the Cuspidatus may be 
 very well conceived, by supposing an Incisor , with its 
 corners rubbed off, so as to end in a narrow point, in¬ 
 stead of a thin edge -f ; and the lang differs from that 
 of an Incisor , only in being much larger J. 
 
 The outside of the body of a Cuspidatus projects most 
 at the side next the Incisores , being there more angular 
 than any where else. 
 
 * Vide Plate VI. Fig. i. Plate V. Row I, 3d Fig. bb. 
 + Vide Plate IV. Fig. 1, at bb. 
 t Vide Plate VI. Fig. j. 
 
 The 
 
The Enamel covers more of the lateral parts of these 
 Teeth than of the Incisores ; they stand perpendicularly, 
 or nearly so, projecting farther out in the circle than 
 the others; so that the two Cuspidati and the four Inc is ores 
 often stand almost in a straight line, especially in the 
 Lower Jaw. 
 
 This takes place only in adults, and in them only 
 when the second Teeth are rather too large for the arch 
 of the Jaw ; for we never find this when the Teeth are 
 at any distance from one another, or in young subjects. 
 Their points commonly project beyond the horizontal 
 line formed by the row of Teeth; #nd their fanns run 
 deeper into the Jaws, and are oftener a little bent. 
 
 In the Upper Jaw they are rather longer, and do not 
 project much beyond the circle of the adjacent Teeth; 
 and in this Jaw they are not placed vertically, their 
 bodies being turned a little forwards and outwards. 
 
 . ) " /• / 
 
 When the Jaws are closed, the Cuspidatus of the Upper 
 
 Jaw falls between, and projects a little over the Cuspi¬ 
 datus and first Bicuspis of the Lower Jaw. When they 
 are a little worn down by use, they commonly first take 
 an edge somewhat like a worn Incisor , and afterwards be¬ 
 come rounder. 
 
 H 2 
 
 The 
 
5i 
 
 OF THE CUSPIDATUS. 
 
 The use of the Cuspidati would seem to be, to lay hold 
 of substances, perhaps even living animals; they are 
 not formed for dividing, as the Inciso?*es are ; nor are they 
 fit for grinding. We may trace in these Teeth a simi¬ 
 larity in shape, situation, and use, from the most im¬ 
 perfectly carnivorous animal, which we believe to be 
 the human species, to the most perfectly carnivorous, 
 viz. the lion. 
 
;? ' f — rtl fi - 7 r ‘ +J 13 1 " 
 
 -.6 u 1 A Ui is J J d Ja i 1 -u> 
 
 Gi iScl'Ot ff!3! 
 
 H 'JjVm a ^ ^ 
 
 "« 1 ■ 
 
 M-> 
 
 ‘■if. 
 
 • •■» f; 
 
 , f ‘ fa :,‘ f 7 ;■ V ' f?f '- "• ' » ■ , - -r V ,',£fj .- 
 
 *' ® ' , I i 
 
 < - ljS <w >vw\ 3th ssK omhhif 
 
 OF THE 
 
 a k 
 
 ^rrr 
 
 BICUSPIDES. 
 
 »TIXtlBD 
 
 IMMEDIATELY behind the Chspidati , in each Jaw, 
 ^stand two Teeth, commonly called the first and second 
 Grinders; but which, for reasons hinted at above, I 
 shall suppose to constitute a particular class, and call 
 them Bicuspides . 
 
 These (viz. the fourth and fifth Tooth from the 
 symphysis of the Jaw) resemble each other so nearly, 
 that a description of the first will serve for both. The 
 first indeed is frequently the smallest, and has rather the 
 longest fang, having somewhat more of the shape of 
 the Cuspidatus than the second. 
 
 The body of this Tooth is flattened laterally, an¬ 
 swering to the flat side of the fang. It terminates in 
 two points, viz. one external and one internal. The 
 external is the longest and thickest; so that on looking 
 into the mouth from without, this point only can be seen, 
 and the Tooth has very much the appearance of a Cuspi¬ 
 datus ; especially the first of these Teeth. The internal 
 
 • point 
 
56 
 
 OF THE BICUSPIDES, 
 
 point is the least, and indeed sometimes so very small, 
 that the Tooth has the greatest resemblance to a Cuspi- 
 datus in any view*. At the union of the points the Tooth 
 is thickest, and thence it loses in thickness, from side to 
 side, to the extremity of the fang ; so that the fang 
 continues pretty broad to the point, and is often forked 
 there. All the Teeth hitherto described often have their 
 points bent, and more particularly the Cuspidati. 
 
 f * ' i t y . * 1 _ L . K'"\, 
 
 The Enamel passes somewhat farther down exter¬ 
 nally, and upon the inside, than laterally ; but this dif¬ 
 ference is not so considerable as in the I^cisores^ and 
 Cuspidati \ in some indeed it terminates equally all round 
 the Tooth. They stand almost perpendicularly, but 
 seem to be a little turned inwards, especially the last of 
 them. 
 
 In the Upper Jaw they are rather thicker than in 
 the Lower, and are turned a very little forwards and 
 outwards. The first in the Upper Jaw falls between the 
 tw T o in the Lower. The second falls between the second 
 and the first Grinder: and both project over those of 
 the Lower Jaw, but less than the Incisores and Cuspidati, 
 
 The Bicuspides , and especially the second of them, 
 in both Jaws, are oftener naturally wanting than any of 
 
 the 
 
 * Vide Plate IV. Fig. i, 2, c, t. 
 
OF THE BICUSPIDES, 
 
 the Teeth, except the Dentes Sapient ice : thence we might 
 conjecture that they are less useful ; and this con¬ 
 jecture appears less improbable, when we consider that, 
 in their tise, they are of a middle nature between Cutters 
 and Grinders; and that in most animals, so far as I 
 have observed, there is a vacant space between the 
 Cutters and Grinders. I have also seen a Jaw in which 
 the first Bicuspis was of the same shape and size as a 
 Grinder, and projected, for want of room, between the 
 Cuspidatus and second Bicuspis. These and the Grinders 
 alter very little in shape on their grinding surfaces by 
 use; their points only wear down, and become obtuse. 
 
 OF 
 
/ 
 
 OF THE 
 
 GRINDERS. 
 
 In describing the Grinders, we shall first consider the 
 first and second conjunctly, because they are nearly the 
 same in every particular; and-then give an account of 
 the third or last Grinder, which differs from them in 
 some circumstances.^ 
 
 The two first Grinders differ from the Bicuspides^ 
 principally in being much larger, and in having more 
 points upon their body, and more fangs*. 
 
 The body forms almost a square, with rounded angles. 
 The grinding surface has commonly five points, or pro¬ 
 tuberances, two of which are on the inner, and three 
 on the outer part of the Tooth ; and generally some 
 smaller points at the roots of these larger protuberances. 
 These protuberances make an irregular cavity in the 
 middle of the .Tooth. The three outer points do 
 not stand so near the outer edge of the Tooth, as the 
 inner do on the inside ; so that the body of the Tooth 
 swells out more from the points, or is more convex, on 
 the outside. The body towards its neck becomes but very 
 little smaller, and there divides into two flat fangs, one 
 
 forwards, 
 
 * Vide Plate IV, Fig. i, 2 > <U 
 
Ot THE GRINDERS* 
 
 forwards, the other backwards, with their edges turned 
 outwards and inwards, and their sides consequently 
 forwards and backwards : the fangs are but very little 
 narrower at their ends, which are pretty broad, and 
 often bifurcated. There are two cavities in each fang, 
 one towards each edge, leading to the general cavity 
 in the body of the Tooth* These two cavities are 
 formed by the meeting of the sides of the fang in the 
 middle, thereby dividing the broad and flat cavity into 
 two* ; and all along the outside of these (and all the 
 other flat fangs) there is a corresponding longitudinal 
 groove. These fangs, at their middle, are generally bent 
 a little backwards -f*. 
 
 1 v .Vv. . „ r m ^ -A— L/vJ A- W* • » 
 
 The Enamel covers the bodies of these Teeth pretty 
 equally all round. 
 
 The first Grinder is somewhat larger and stronger than 
 the second; it is turned a little more inwards than the 
 adjacent Bicmpides , but not so much as the second 
 Grinder. Both of them have generally shorter fangs 
 than the Bicuspides . 
 
 There is a greater difference between these Grinders 
 in the Upper and Lower Jaw, than any of the other 
 
 I Teeth. 
 
 * • ««■ V • 1 
 
 ♦ Vide Plate XIV. Fig. 7, where four dafk spots are observed* 
 t Vide Plate VL Fig. t . 
 
Teeth. In the Upper Jaw they are rather rhomboidal 
 than square in their body, with one sharp angle turned 
 forwards and outwards, the other backwards and in- 
 wards : besides, they have three fangs, which diverge, 
 and terminate each in a point ; these are almost round, 
 and have but one cavity. Two of them are placed near 
 each other perpendicularly, over the outside of the 
 
 Tooth; and the other, which generally is the largest, 
 
 > 
 
 stands at a greater distance on the inside of the Tooth, 
 slanting inwards. In this Jaw these two Grinders are 
 inclined outwards, and a little forwards ; they project 
 a little over the corresponding Teeth of the Lower Jaw, 
 and they are placed farther back in the mouth, so that 
 each is partly opposed to two of the Lower Jaw. The 
 second in the Upper Jaw is smaller than the others, 
 and the first and second are placed directly under the 
 Maxillary Sinus. I once saw the second Grinder naturally 
 wanting on one side of the Lower Jaw. 
 
 The third Grinder is commonly called Dens Sapientice ; 
 it is a little shorter and smaller than the others, and in¬ 
 clined a little more inwards and forwards. Its body is 
 
 • 
 
 nearly of the same figure, but rather rounder, and its 
 fangs are generally not so regular and distinct; for they 
 often appear squeezed together; and sometimes there is 
 only one fang, which makes the Tooth conical: it is 
 much smaller than the rest of the Grinders. In the 
 
,Z S 3 0 Vi T Si Q 3 K T 3 0 O'! 
 
 OF THE GRINDERS. 6i 
 
 I ,• t > , t ri > c /> <?^r-* • tt t ^ » °t^rrrt t i n i * < » . j 
 
 Upper Jaw this Tooth has more variety than in the 
 Lower, and is even smaller than the corresponding 
 Tooth of the Lower, and thence stands directly opposed 
 to it; but for this circumstance, the Grinders would 
 reach farther back in the Upper Jaw than in the Lower, 
 which is not commonly the case. 
 
 k . | rr y ► ' *’ ■> * f r 
 
 In the Upper Jaw this third Grinder is turned but 
 a very little outwards ; is frequently inclined some¬ 
 what backwards ; and it projects over that of the Under 
 Jaw. It oftener becomes loose than any of the other 
 Teeth. ^ Liu; 
 
 .^f!T WftT 19WO I if) OW > Ot 0980000 ViiTEO J13159 
 
 v , X * f +* i w J A 11 v. 1 ** 
 
 They are placed under the posterior part of the 
 Maxillary Sinus, and there the parts which compose the 
 Sinus are thicker than in the middle. The variations 
 as to the natural number of the Teeth, depend com¬ 
 monly upon these Dentes Sapient ice. 
 
 Thus from the bicisores to the first Grinder, the Teeth 
 become gradually thicker at the extremity of their 
 bodies, and smaller from the first Grinder to the Dens 
 Sapient ice. From the Cuspidatus to the Dens Sapientice the 
 fangs become much shorter; the Incisores are nearly of 
 the same length with the Bicuspides . From the first Inci¬ 
 sor to the last Grinder, the Teeth stand less out from the 
 sockets and Gums. 
 
 I 2 
 
 The 
 
62 
 
 OF THE GRINDERS. 
 
 The bodies of the Teeth in the Lower Jaw are turned 
 a little outwards at the anterior part of the Jaw, and 
 thence, to the third Grinder, they are inclined gra¬ 
 dually more inwards. The Teeth in the Upper Jaw pro¬ 
 ject over those of the Under, especially at the fore part, 
 which is owing to the greater obliquity of the Teeth 
 in the Upper Jaw ; for the circle of the sockets is nearly 
 the same in both Jaws. This oblique situation, however, 
 becomes gradually less, from the Incisor es , backwards to 
 the last Grinder, which makes them gradually project 
 less in the same proportion. 
 
 The Teeth in the Upper Jaw are placed farther back 
 in the circle than the corresponding Teeth of the Lower : 
 this is owing to the two first Incisor es above being broader 
 than the corresponding Incisor es below. All the Teeth 
 have only one fang, except the Grinders, each of which 
 has two in the Lower Jaw, and three in the Upper 
 
 The fangs bear a proportion to the bodies of the 
 Teeth ; and the reason is evident, for otherwise they 
 would have been easily broken, or pushed out of their 
 sockets. The force commonly applied to them is oblique, 
 
 not 
 
 * Those Anatomists who allow the Teeth to have more fangs, have been led into 
 a mistake, I suppose, by often observing two canals in one fang; and thence 
 concluded, that such a fang was originally two, and that these were now grown 
 together. 
 
 / 
 
OF THE GRINDERS, 
 
 63 
 
 not perpendicular; and they are not so firmly fixed in 
 the Upper Jaw, that is, the Alveolar Process in that is 
 not so strong as in the Under Jaw : it is perhaps on 
 this account, that the Grinders in that Jaw have three 
 fangs. 
 
 < 
 
 This particular structure in the Alveolar Process of 
 the Upper Jaw, is perhaps to give more room for the 
 AntrumHighmorianum\ on this supposition, the fangs must 
 be made accordingly, i. e. so that they shall not be pushed 
 into that cavity : now, by their diverging, they inclose 
 as it were the bottom of the Antrum y and do not push 
 against its middle, which is the weakest part; and the 
 points of three diverging fangs will make a greater 
 resistance (or not be so easily pushed in) than if they 
 were placed parallel. If there had been only two, as in 
 the Lower Jaw, they must have been placed opposite 
 to the thinnest part of the Antrum ; and three points 
 placed in any direction but a diverging one, would have 
 had here much the same effect as two; and as the force 
 applied is endeavouring to depress the Tooth, and push 
 it inwards, the innermost fang diverges most, and is 
 supported by the inner wall of the Antrum . That all 
 this weakness in the Upper Jaw is for the increase of 
 the Antrum is probable, because all the Teeth in the 
 Upper Jaw are a good deal similar to those in the 
 Lower, excepting those that are opposite to the 
 
 Maxillary 
 
64 
 
 OF THE GRINDERS. 
 
 Maxillary Sinus; and here they differ principally in 
 the fangs, without any other apparent reason ; and 
 what confirms this, is, that the Dentes Sapient ice in both 
 Jaws are more alike than the other Grinders ; for this 
 reason, as I apprehend, because the Dens Sapientice in 
 the Upper Jaw does not interfere so much with the 
 Maxillary Sinus. * 
 
 m 
 
 \tt ry 
 lit 
 
 
 What makes it still more probable that the two first 
 superior Grinders have three fangs, on account of the 
 Maxillary Sinus, is, that the two Grinders on each side 
 of the Upper Jaw, in the child, have three fangs, and. 
 we find them underneath the Antrum ; but those that 
 succeed them have only one fang, as in the Lower Jaw; 
 but by that time the Antrum has passed farther back, 
 or rather the arch of the Jaw has projected, or shot 
 forwards, as it were, from under the Antra ; so that the 
 Alveolar Processes that were under the Antrum at one 
 age, are got before it in another. 
 
 / 
 
 That the edge of every fang is turned towards the 
 circumference of the Jaw, in order to counteract the 
 ‘acting power, we shall see when we consider the 
 Motion of the Jaw, and the Use of the Teeth. 
 
 OP 
 
m 
 
 T> I l E ftr 
 
 ..fens .. ; 
 ib( /• 
 
 •* niLb v^rH mod firm {zutiiZ ymthv' 
 n v, !snsccrg id to vns Irorfixw „8*cr~j-,: 
 
 OF THE 
 
 ! _ 
 
 -'.ri- -’y y*4 ./“y ' r \ 
 
 1X;.' 
 
 •e.r(- 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE TEETH. 
 
 The fangs of the Teeth are fixed in the Gum and 
 Alveolar Processes, by that species of Articulation called 
 Gomphosis, which, in some measure, resembles a naii 
 driven into a piece of wood*. 
 
 They are not, however, firmly united with the Pro¬ 
 cesses, for every Tooth has some degree of motion ; and 
 in heads which have been boiled or macerated in water, 
 so as to destroy the Periosteum and adhesion of the 
 Teeth, we find the Teeth so loosely connected with their 
 sockets, that all of them are ready to drop out, except 
 the Grinders, which remain as it were hooked, from the 
 number and shape of their fangs. 
 
 ;ftt 'fm •• } h rr t . - ■ yr v,- v. 
 
 * Vide Plate I. for the sockets; and Plate VI, for the Teeth themselves in their 
 sockets. 
 
O F 
 
 .THE GUMS. 
 
 rn 
 
 1 HE Alveolar Processes are covered by a red vascular 
 substance, called the Gums, which has as many per¬ 
 forations as there are Teeth ; and the neck of a Tooth 
 is covered by, and fixed to this Gum. Thence 
 there are fleshy partitions between the Teeth, passing 
 between the external and internal Gum, and as it 
 were uniting them ; these partitions are higher 
 than the other parts of the Gum, and thence form 
 an arch between every two adjacent Teeth. The 
 thickness of that part of the Gum which projects 
 beyond the sockets is considerable ; so that when the 
 Gum is corroded by disease, by boiling, or other¬ 
 wise, the Teeth appear longer, or less sunk into the 
 Jaw. The Gum adheres very firmly in a healthful 
 state both to the Alveolar Process and to the Teeth, but 
 its extreme border is naturally loose all around the 
 Teeth. The Gum, in substance, has something of a 
 cartilaginous hardness and elasticity, and is very vas¬ 
 cular, but seems not to have any great degree of sensibi¬ 
 lity ; for though we often wound it in eating, and in 
 picking our Teeth, yet we do not feel much pain upon 
 these occasions; and both in infants and old people, 
 
 where 
 
OF THE GUMS. 
 
 
 where there are no Teeth, the Gums bear a very con- 
 siderable pressure, without pain. 
 
 The advantage arising from this degree of insensibility 
 in the Gums, is obvious; for till the child cuts its Teeth, 
 the Gums are to do the business of Teeth, and are 
 therefore formed for this purpose, having a hard ridge 
 running through their whole length. Old people, who 
 have lost their Teeth, have not this ridge. When in a 
 sound state, the Gums are not easily irritated by being 
 woujided, and therefore are not so liable to inflammation 
 as other parts, and soon heal. 
 
 The Teeth being united to the Jaw by the Periosteum 
 and Gum, have some degree of a yielding motion in 
 the living body. Thjs circumstance renders them more 
 secure ; it breaks the jar of bony contact, and prevents 
 fractures both of the sockets and of the Teeth them¬ 
 selves. 
 
 o F 
 
 K 
 
6 3 
 
 OF T HE ACTION 
 
 OF THE 
 
 ACTION of the TEETH, arising from the 
 Motion of the Lower Jaw. 
 
 rn 
 
 I HE Lower Jaw may be said to be the only one 
 that has any motion in mastication; for the Upper 
 Jaw can only move with the other parts of the head. 
 That the Upper Jaw and head should be raised in the 
 common act of opening the mouth, or chewing, would 
 seem, at first sight, improbable ; and from an attentive 
 view of the mechanism of the joints and muscles of 
 those parts, from experiment and observation, we find 
 that they do not sensibly move. We shall only mention 
 one experiment in proof of this, which seems conclusive: 
 let a man place himself near some fixed point, and look 
 over it, to another distant and immoveable object, when 
 he is eating. If his head should rise in the least degree., 
 he would see more of the distant object over the nearest 
 fixed point, which, in fact he does not. The nearer the 
 fixed point is, and the more distant the object, the ex¬ 
 periment will be more accurate and convincing. The 
 result of the experiment will be the same, if the nearest 
 point has the same motion with the head; as, when he 
 looks from under the edge of a hat, or any thing else put 
 
 upon 
 
 r 
 
OF THE TEETH. C'9 
 
 upon his head, at some distant fixed object. We may 
 conclude then that the motion is entirely in the Lower 
 Jaw: and, as we have already described both the 
 articulation and the motion of the bone, we shall now 
 explain the action of mastication, and, at the same 
 time, consider the use of each class of Teeth. 
 
 With regard to the action of the Teeth of both Jaws, 
 in mastication, we may observe once for all, that their 
 action and re-action must be always equal, and that the 
 Teeth of the Upper and Lower Jaws are complete, and 
 equal antagonists both in cutting and grinding. 
 
 When the Lower Jaw is depressed, the Condyles slide 
 forwards on the eminences; and they return back again 
 into the cavities, when the Jaw is completely raised. 
 
 This simple action produces a grinding motion of the 
 Lower Jaw, backwards on the Upper, and is used 
 when we divide any thing with our fore Teeth, or 
 Incisores. For this purpose, the Incisor es are w r ell formed; 
 as they are higher than the others, their edges must 
 come in contract sooner ; and as the Upper project over 
 the Under, we find, in dividing any substance with them, 
 that we first bring them opposite to one another, and as 
 they pass through the part to be divided, the Lower 
 Jaw is brought back, while the Incisors of that [aw 
 
 K 2 slide 
 
OF THE ACTIOTN 
 
 7 :) 
 
 slide up behind those of the Upper Jaw, and of course 
 pass by one another. In this way they complete the 
 division like a pair of scissars ; and at the same time they 
 sharpen one another. There are exceptions to this; for 
 these Teeth in some people meet equally, viz. in those 
 people whose Fore Teeth do not project further from the 
 Gum, or socket, than the back Teeth ; and such Teeth 
 are not so fit for dividing: and in some people the Teeth 
 of the Lower Jaw are so placed, as to come before those 
 of the Upper Jaw; this situation is as favourable for 
 cutting as when the over-lapping of the Teeth is the 
 reverse, except for this circumstance, that the Lower Jaw 
 must be longer, and therefore its action weaker. 
 
 The other motion of the Lower Jaw, viz. when the 
 lateral Teeth are used, is somewhat different from the 
 former. In opening the mouth, one Condyle Aides a 
 little forwards, and the other slides a little further 
 back into its cavity; this throws the Jaw a little to 
 that side, just enough to bring the lower Teeth directly 
 under their corresponding Teeth in the Upper Jaw : this 
 is done, either in dividing, or holding of substances £ 
 and these are the Teeth that are generally used in the 
 last-mentioned action. When the true grinding motion 
 is to be performed, a greater degree of this last 
 motion takes place; that is, the Condyle of the oppo¬ 
 site side is brought farther forwards, and the Condyle 
 
 of 
 
OF THE 'TEETH. 71 
 
 of the same side is drawn farther back into the cavity of 
 the Temporal Bone, and the Jaw is a little depressed. 
 This is only preparatory for the effect to be produced ; 
 for the moving back of the first-mentioned Condyle into 
 
 the socket, is what produces the effect in mastication. 
 
 ♦ 
 
 ' « > 
 
 The lateral Teeth in both Jaws are adapted to this 
 oblique motion; in the Lower they are turned a little 
 inwards, that they may act more in the direction of 
 their axis ; and here the Alveolar Process is strongest 
 upon the outside, being there supported by the ridge at 
 the root of the Coronoid Process. In the Upper Jaw 
 the obliquity of the Teeth is the reverse, that is, they 
 
 are turned outwards, for the same reason ; and the 
 
 * 
 
 longest fang of the Grinders is upon the inside, where 
 the socket is strengthened by the bony partition between 
 the antrum and nose. Hence it is, that the Teeth of 
 the Lower Jaw have their outer edges worn down first \ 
 and vice versa\ in the Upper Jaw. , 
 
 i 
 
 GENE- 
 
72 
 
 GENERAL COMPARISONS 
 
 GENERAL COMPARISONS 
 
 BETWEEN THE 
 
 MOTION of the JAW in You-ng and in Old People. 
 
 In children who have not yet Teeth, there does not 
 seem to be a sliding motion in the Lower Jaw. The 
 articular eminence of the Temporal Bone is not yet 
 formed, and the cavity is not larger than the Condyle ; 
 therefore the centre of motion in such, must be in the 
 Condyle. In old people, who have lost their Teeth, the 
 centre of motion appears to -be in the Condyles, and 
 the motion of their Jaw to be only depression and ele¬ 
 vation. They never depress the Jaw sufficiently to bring 
 the Condyle forwards on the eminence, because in 
 them the mouth is sufficiently opened when the Jaw is 
 in its natural position. 
 
 Hence it is, that in old people the gums of the two 
 Jaws do not meet in the fore part of the mouth *, and 
 they cannot bite at that part so well, as at the side 
 of the Jaw ; and, instead of the grinding motion, which 
 
 would 
 
 * Vide Plate VII. where the Symphysis of the Lower Jaw, when the mouth 
 is shut, projects considerably farther forwards than that of the Upper. 
 
ON THE MOTION OF THE JAW. 73 
 
 would be useless, where there are no Grinders; they 
 bruise their food rather by a simple motion of the Jaw 
 upwards and downwards. 
 
 It is from the want of Teeth in both those ages, that 
 the face is shorter in proportion to its breadth. In an 
 old person, after the Teeth are gone, the face is shorter, 
 while the mouth is shut, by almost the whole lengths 
 of the Teeth in both Jaws,; that is, about an inch and 
 a half. 
 
 From the want of Teeth too, at both those ages, the 
 cavity of the mouth is then smaller; and the tongue seems 
 too large and unmanageable, more especially in old 
 people. In these last we observed also, that the chin 
 projects forwards, in proportion as the mouth is shut; 
 because the basis of the Lower Jaw (which is all that now 
 remains) describes a wider circle than the Alveolar Pro¬ 
 cess in younger people. The Jaws do not project so 
 much forwards in a child, as in an adult; hence the 
 face is flatter, especially at the lower part. In propor¬ 
 tion as the last Grinders are produced, the sides of the 
 curve formed by the Jaws become longer, and push for¬ 
 ward the fore part, none of the additional part passing 
 backwards. The fore part also continues nearly of the 
 same size, so that the whole Jaw is longer in proportion 
 to its breadth, and projects farther forwards. 
 
 OF 
 
74 
 
 OF THE FORMATION 
 
 ? r. r , -.j.j 
 
 OF THE 
 
 FORMATION of the ALVEOLAR PROCESS. 
 
 Having considered the Alveolar Processes in their 
 adult or perfect state, we shall next examine and trace 
 them from their beginning. 
 
 w t scgftjd rsq € jKxr&n *mT 
 
 We observe the beginning of the Alveolar Process at a 
 very early period. In a foetus of three or four months, 
 it is only a longitudinal groove, deeper and narrower 
 forwards, and becoming gradually more shallow and 
 wider backwards: instead of bony partitions dividing 
 that groove into a number of sockets, there are only 
 slight ridges across the bottom and sides, with inter¬ 
 mediate depressions, which mark the future Alveoli 
 
 In the Lower Jaw the vessels and nerves run along 
 the bottom of this Alveolar cavity, in a slight groove, 
 which afterwards becomes a complete and distinct bony 
 canal. 
 
 The 
 
 * Vide Plate VIII. Fig i, 2 
 
OF THE ALVEOLAR PROCESS. 
 
 The Alveolar Process grows with the Teeth, and 
 for some time keeps the start of them. The ridges 
 which are to make the partitions shoot from the sides 
 across the canal, at the mouth of the cell, forming hol¬ 
 low arches: this change happens first at the anterior 
 parts of the Jawsf. As each cell becomes deeper, 
 its mouth also grows narrower, and at length is almost, 
 but not quite, closed over the contained Tooth. 
 
 The disposition for contracting the mouth of the 
 cell, is chiefly in the outer plate of the bone, which 
 occasions the contracted orifices of the cells to be nearer 
 the inner edge of the Jaw. The reason, perhaps, why 
 the bone shoots over, and almost covers the Tooth, is, 
 that the Gum may be firmly supported before the 
 Teeth have come through. 
 
 The Alveoli\ which belong to the adult Grinders, are 
 formed in another manner : in the Lower Jaw they would 
 seem to be the remains of the root of the Coronoid Pro¬ 
 cess X > for the ceils are forned for those Teeth in the root 
 of that Process: and in proportion as the body of the 
 bone, and the cells already formed, push forwards from 
 
 L v under 
 
 * Vide Plate VIII. Fig. I, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. 
 
 t Vide Plate VIII. Fig. 7, which is most remarkable ia those of the Grinders 5 
 &s these Alveoli are not opened for the exit of the Teeth. 
 
 t Vide Plate ,X. Fig. x< 
 
7o 
 
 OF THE ALVEOLAR PROCESS. 
 
 under that Process, the succeeding cells and their Teeth 
 are formed and pushed forward in the same manner. 
 
 In the Upper Jaw there are cells formed in the 
 bercles for the young Grinders, which at first are very 
 
 % 
 
 shallow, and become deeper and deeper as the Teeth 
 grow; and they grow somewhat faster, so as almost to 
 inclose the whole Tooth before it is ready to push its 
 way through that inclosure and GumThere is a 
 succession of these, till the whole three Grinders are 
 formed, 
 
 / 
 
 * Vide Plate I, Fig. io» 
 
 OF 
 
OF THE 
 
 FORMATION of the TEETH in the FOETUS. 
 
 C jl\ ' ' ( » > . , ; j " -» j » N - .. ?-/' < 
 
 » • 
 
 The depression, or first rudiments of the Alveoli , 
 observable in a Foetus of three or four months, is 
 filled with four or five little pulpy substances, which are 
 not very distinct at this age. About the fifth month 
 both the processes themselves and the pulpy substances 
 become more distinct; the anterior of which are the 
 most complete. About this age, too, the ossifications 
 begin on the edge of the first Incisores . The Cuspidati 
 are not in the same circular line with the rest, but some¬ 
 what on the outside, making a projection there at this 
 age, there not being sufficient room for therm 
 
 In the sixth or seventh month, the edges, or tips, 
 of all these five substances are begun to ossify, and 
 
 the first of them is a little advanced * ; and besides 
 
 / , 
 
 these, the pulp of the sixth Tooth has begun to be 
 formed : it is situated in the tubercle of the Upper 
 
 L 2 Jaw, 
 
 * Vide Plate X. Fig. 4, 5, where these ossifications are represented. 
 
7S OF THE FORMATION OF THE TEETH 
 
 Jaw, and under and on the inside of the Coronoid Pro¬ 
 cess in the Lower Jaw : so that at this age, in both Jaws, 
 there are in all twenty Teeth begun to ossify, and the 
 stamina of twenty-four. They may be divided into the 
 Incisores , Cuspidati , and Molares ; for at this age there 
 are no Bicuspides, the two last Teeth in each side of both 
 Jaws having all the characteristics, and answering all the 
 purposes of the true Molares in the adult, though, when 
 these first Molares fall out, their places are taken by the 
 Bicuspides . 
 
 » 
 
 The Teeth gradually advance in their ossification ; 
 and, about the seventh, eighth, or ninth month after 
 birth, the Incisores begin to cut or pass through the 
 Gums; first, generally, in the Lower Jaw. Before this 
 time, the ossifications in the third Grinder, or that which 
 makes the first in the adult, are begun 
 
 The Cuspid at us and Molares of the Foetus are not 
 formed so fast as the Incisores ; they generally all appear 
 nearly about the same time, viz. about the twentieth, 
 or twenty-fourth month : however, the first Grinder is 
 often more advanced within the socket than the Cuspi- 
 datus , and most commonly appears before it, 
 
 These 
 
 / 5 , 
 
 * Vide Plate X. Fig. 6 , where the first Incisors had cut the Gum, and where the 
 third Grinder in the child, or first in the adult, was begun to ossify. 
 
 / 
 
H T33 
 
 IN THE FCETUS. 
 
 79 
 
 These twenty are the only Teeth that are of use to 
 the child from the seventh, eighth, or ninth month, 
 till the twelfth or fourteenth year. These*are called 
 the Temporary or Milk Teeth, because they are all 
 shed between the years of seven and fourteen, and are 
 supplied by others. 
 
 arhife -Ennov/cH*; bnjs .eohsmtoJMrlp ?rli Ifr, sniv^rl 
 
 r c> v * o ^ 
 
 ™ V f x t f ? ^ f V • 1 v i cr • 
 
 nanw ( i;gnont t l jjdb sin m eird aril io z^ocpuq 
 
 vd oxc gsoeftr lierit ,iuo Iff) tvssAvM teiti 
 
 
 so tbxh r:i 3Dn£vfc>£ ylkribmg rft^T odT 
 
 irri rftnifl pro t ib4§b t £na3V32 jdft 3 l ' ' ? Bns 
 
 sd} t dnid 
 
 cr nnv/a r nr dfpWt'ttv ; smoO 
 
 [ Tf*' 
 
 
 
 
 
 t ' 
 
 ; -a oril /jrnit 
 
 r/i 
 
 
 if 
 
 . 
 
 V 
 
 ; f 1. uoi 
 
 »'> J? >m b, 
 
 ■ T « > 
 
 ' J k' * 
 
 ■ 
 
 OF 
 
80 
 
 OF THE CAUSE OF PAIN 
 
 OF THE 
 
 CAUSE of PAIN in DENTITION. 
 
 rn 
 
 -1- HESE twenty Teeth, in cutting the Gum, give 
 pain, and produce many other symptoms which often 
 prove fatal to children in Dentition. It has been 
 generally supposed that these symptoms arise from the 
 Tooth’s pressing upon the inside of the Gum, and 
 working its way mechanically; but the following obser¬ 
 vations seem to be nearer the truth. 
 
 The Teeth, when they begin to press against the 
 Gum, irritate it, and commonly give pain. The Gums 
 are then affected with heat, swelling, redness, and the 
 other symptoms of inflammation. The Gum is not 
 cut through by simple or mechanical pressure, but the 
 irritation and consequent inflammation produces a 
 thinning, or wasting of the Gum at this part : for it 
 often happens that when an extraneous, or a dead 
 substance, is contained in the body, that it produces 
 a destruction of the part between it, and that part of 
 the skin which is nearest it, and seldom of the other 
 parts excepting those between it and the surface of a 
 cavity opening externally, and that by no means so 
 
 frequently. 
 
I 
 
 IN CUTTING OF TEETH. 81 
 
 frequently. And in those cases there is an absorption of 
 the solids, or of the part destroyed, not a melting down, 
 or solution of them into Pus. The Teeth are to be 
 looked upon as extraneous bodies, with respect to the 
 Gum, and as such they irritate the inside of that part 
 in the same manner as the Pus of an abscess, an exfo¬ 
 liation of a bone, or any other extraneous body; and 
 therefore produce the same symptoms, excepting only 
 the formation of matter. If, therefore, these symptoms 
 attend the cutting of the Teeth, there can be no doubt 
 of the propriety of opening the way for them ; nor 
 is it ever, as far as I have observed, attended with any 
 dangerous consequence. 
 
 OF 
 
 i 
 
82 
 
 OF THE FORMATION AND PROGRESS. 
 
 OF THE 
 
 FORMATION AND PROGRESS OF THE 
 
 ADULT TEETH. 
 
 I 
 
 Having now considered the first formation, and 
 the progress of the Temporary Teeth, we shall next 
 describe the formation of those Teeth which are to serve 
 through life. 
 
 In this enquiry, to avoid confusion, I shall confine 
 the description to the Teeth in the Lower Jaw ; for the 
 only difference between those in the two Jaws, is in the 
 time of their appearance, and generally it is later in 
 the Upper Jaw. Their formation and appearance pro¬ 
 ceed not regularly from the first Incisor backwards to 
 the Dens Sapiential > but it begins at two points on each 
 side of both Jaws, viz. at the first Incisor , and at the 
 first Molaris . The Teeth between these two points 
 
 make a quicker progress than those behind. 
 
 > § » - . 
 
 i 
 
 The Pulp of the first adult Incisor , and of the first adult 
 Molaris , begin to appear in a Foetus of seven or eight 
 months, and five or six months after birth the ossifi¬ 
 cation 
 
OF THE ADULT TEETH. 
 
 83 
 
 cation begins in them; soon after birth, the Pulp of the 
 second Incisor and Cuspidatus begin to be formed, and 
 about eight or nine months afterwards they begin to 
 ossify ; about the fifth or sixth year the first Bicuspis 
 appears ; about the sixth or seventh, the* second Bicuspis 
 and the second Molaris ; and about the twelfth, the 
 third Molaris , or Dens Sapiential . 
 
 The first five may be called the permanent Teeth : 
 they differ from the temporary .in having larger fangs. 
 The permanent Incisores and Cuspidati are much thicker 
 and broader, and the Molar es are succeeded by Bicusp ides > 
 which are smaller, and have but one fang. 
 
 All these permanent or succeeding Teeth are formed 
 in distinct Alveoli of their own ; so that they do not fill 
 up the old sockets of the temporary Teeth, but have 
 their new Alveoli formed as the old ones decay*. 
 
 «■ # / l » t lit 
 
 The first Incisor is placed on the inside of the root of 
 the corresponding temporary Tooth, and deeper in the 
 jaw. The second Incisor and the Cuspidatus begin to be 
 formed on the inside, and somewhat under the tem¬ 
 porary second Incisor and Cuspidatus . These three are all 
 situated much in the same manner, with respect to the 
 
 M first 
 
 4 » A* . / % ' i r 
 
 * Vide Plate X, Fig. i, 2, and 3. 
 
84 
 
 OF TH 1 FORMATION AND PROGRESS 
 
 first set; but as they are larger, they are placed somewhat 
 farther back in the circle of the Jaw. 
 
 The first Bicusps is placed under, and somewhat 
 farther back than the first temporary Grinder, or fourth 
 Tooth of the child. 
 
 The second Bicuspis is placed immediately under the 
 
 second temporary Grinder. 
 
 > / , 
 
 i / - i - 
 
 The second Molar is is situated in the lengthening 
 tubercle in the Upper Jaw, and directly under the Coro- 
 noid Process in the Lower. 
 
 The third Molar is ^ or Dens Sapietitice , begins to form 
 immediately under the Coronoid Process. 
 
 . The first Adult Molaris comes to perfection, and cuts 
 the Gum about the twelfth year of age; the second, about 
 the eighteenth ; and the third, or Dens Sapientite , from 
 the twentieth to the thirtieth : so that the Incisores and 
 Cuspidati require about six or seven years, from their 
 first appearance, to come to perfection; the Bicuspides , 
 about seven or eight; and the Molares , about twelve. 
 
 It sometimes happens that a third set of Teeth appears 
 
 in very old people: when this does happen, it is 
 * ^ • 
 
 ‘ 1 in 
 

 >in 
 
 OF THE ADULT TEETH. 
 
 85 
 
 in a very irregular manner; sometimes only one, at 
 other times more, and now and then a complete set 
 comes in both Jaws. I never saw an instance of this 
 kind but once, and there two fore Teeth shot up in the 
 Lower Jaw. ' 
 
 I should suppose that a new Alveolar Process must 
 be also formed in such cases, in the same manner as in 
 the production of the first and second sets of Teeth. 
 From what I can learn, the age at which this happens 
 is generally about seventy. From this circumstance, 
 and another that sometimes happens to women at this 
 age, it would appear that there is some effort in nature 
 to renew the body at that period. 
 
 When this set of Teeth, which happens so late in 
 life, is not complete, especially where they come in one 
 Jaw, and not in the other, they are rather hurtful than 
 useful; for in that case we are obliged to pull them out, 
 as they only wound the opposite Gum. 
 
 M 2 
 
 T-T 131 
 
 - i i--i 
 
8 6 
 
 THE MANNER IN WHICH 
 
 i YO 3 J 1“ (1/1G n f. 7 r { * jsjCi'i ?! (I 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 f man fjjuj oj Otis om. < 
 
 cWbT silt n> • I/*,. . vnc 
 
 
 
 [J 
 
 THE 
 
 MANNER in which a TOOTH is FORMED. 
 
 2i ^ii£i,dmsm sin? ^ernnorn xiovss. io xia 
 
 ■' * > w ^ . -* < - t • 1 ij-i j - . • v f (j \ /ti iJImv ■' i / J j, /, ^ * ' 
 
 np 
 
 X HE body of the Tooth is formed first; afterwards, 
 the Enamel and Fangs are added to it. All the 
 Teeth are produced from a kind of pulpy substance, 
 which is pretty firm in its texture, transparent, excepting 
 at the surface, where it adheres to the Jaw, and has 
 at first the shape of the bodies of the Teeth which are 
 to be formed from it*. These pulpy substances are very 
 vascular; they adhere only at one part to the Jaw, viz. 
 at the bottom of the cavity which is to form the socket, 
 and at that place their vessels enter ; so that they are 
 prominent, and somewhat loose in the bony cavity which 
 lodges them. 
 
 They grow nearly as large as the body of the 
 Tooth before the ossification begins, and increase a little 
 for some time after the ossification is begun. They are 
 surrounded by a membrane, which is not connected 
 with them, excepting at their root or surface of adhesion. 
 
 This 
 
 * Vide Plate XII. Fig. 4, 5, 6, 
 
A TOOTH; IS FORMED. 
 
 87 
 
 This membrane adheres by its outer surface all around 
 the bony cavity in the Jaw, and also to the gum where 
 ii covers the Alveoli. 
 
 When the pulp is very young, as in the Fcetus of 
 six or seven months, this membrane itself is pretty 
 thick and gelatinous*. -We can examine it best in a 
 new-born child, and we find it made up of two lamellae y 
 an external and internal : the external is soft and 
 
 • It- H 9 . \ 
 
 spongy, without any vessels ; the other is much firmer, 
 and extremely vascular, its vessels coming from those 
 that are going to the pulp of the Tooth: it makes a 
 kind of Capsula for the pulp and body of the Tooth. 
 While the Tooth is within the gum, there is always a 
 mucilaginous fluid, like the Sinovia in the joints, between 
 this membrane and the pulp of the Tooth. 
 
 When the Tooth cuts the gum, this membrane like¬ 
 wise is perforated ; after which it begins to waste, and 
 is entirely gone by the time the Tooth is fully formed ; 
 for the lower part of the membrane continues to adhere 
 to the neck of the Tooth, which has now risen as high 
 as the edge of the gum, 
 
 i> - ■ t / 
 
 €- * 
 
 t ; * *9 * < » . | 
 
 * Vide Plate XII. Fig. i, 2. 
 
 i 
 
 OF 
 
88 OF THE OSSIFICATION OF A TOOTH 
 
 OF THE 
 
 OSSIFICATION of a TOOTH UPON THE PULP. 
 
 rn 
 
 JL PIE beginning of the ossification upon the pulp is 
 by one point, or more, according to the kind of Tooth. 
 In the Incisores it is generally by three points, the 
 middle one being the highest, and the first that begins 
 to ossify. The Cuspidatus begins by one point only; 
 the Bicuspis by* two, one external, which is the first 
 and the highest, and the other internal. The Molares y 
 either in a child, or an adult, begin by four or five 
 ossifications, one on each point, the external, always 
 the first*. Where the Teeth began to ossify at one 
 point only, that ossification gradually advances till the 
 Tooth is entirely completed -f ; but if there are more 
 than one point of ossification, each ossification increases 
 till their basis come in contact with one another, and 
 there all unite into one J ; after which they advance in 
 growth as one ossification. 
 
 The 
 
 i 
 
 <% 
 
 * Vide Plate X. Fig. 4, where some of the distinct ossifications may be 
 
 observed. 
 
 f Vide Plate XIII. Fig. i, 2, 3, &c. 
 
 t Vide Plate X. Fig. 5. 
 
UPON THE PULP. 
 
 S 9 
 
 The ossifications in their progress become thicker 
 and thicker where they first began, but increase faster 
 on the edges of the Teeth ; so as thence to become 
 more and more hollow, and the cavity becomes deeper*. 
 As the ossification advances, it gradually surrounds the 
 Pulp till the whole is covered by bone, excepting the 
 under surface : and w r hile the ossifications advance, 
 that part of the Pulp which is covered by bone is 
 always more vascular than the part which is not yet 
 coveredf. 
 
 The adhesion of the Pulp to the new-formed Tooth, 
 or bone, is very slight; for it can always be separated 
 from it without any apparent violence, nor are there any 
 vessels going from the one to the other : the place, how¬ 
 ever, where it is most strongly attached, is round the edge 
 of the bony part, which is the last part formed. When 
 the bone has covered all the Pulp, it begins to contract 
 a little, and becomes somewhat rounded, making that 
 part of the Tooth which is called the neck; and from 
 this place the fangs begin J. When the fangs form, they 
 push up the bodies of the Teeth through the sockets, 
 which waste, and afterwards through the Gum, which 
 
 also 
 
 * Wide Plate XIII. Fig. c, d , two rows of Incisors sawed down the 
 middle, the highest of the child, the other of the adult } c, f, g, two rows of 
 Grinders shewing the same circumstances. 
 
 f Vide Plate XII. Fig. 5, 6. 
 
 t Vide Plate XIII. Fig. i, 2, 3, &c. 
 
90 
 
 OF THE OSSIFICATION OF A TOOTH 
 
 also wastes, as has been explained upon the cutting of 
 the Teeth ; for before this time the rising of the Teeth 
 is scarcely observable, as the Pulp was at first nearly of 
 the size of the body of the Tooth itself, and wasted 
 nearly in proportion to the increase of the whole ossi¬ 
 fication. 
 
 The Pulp has originally no process answering to the 
 fang*; but as the cavity in the body of the Tooth is 
 filled up by the ossification, the pulp is lengthened into 
 a fang. The fang grows in length, and rises higher and 
 higher in the socket, till the whole body of the Tooth 
 is pushed out. The socket, at the same time, contracts 
 at its bottom, and grasps the neck, or beginning fang, 
 adheres to it, and rises with it, which contraction is 
 continued through the whole length of the socket as 
 the fang rises; or the socket which contained the body 
 of the Tooth, being too large for the fang, is wasted 
 or absorbed into the constitution, and a new Alveolar 
 portion is raised with the fang ; whence in reality the 
 fang does not sink, or descend into the Jaw. Both 
 in the body, and in the fang of a growing Tooth, the 
 extreme edge of the ossification is so thin, transparent, 
 and flexible, that it would appear rather to be horny 
 than bony, very much like the mouth or edge of the 
 
 shell of a snail when it is growing : and indeed it would 
 
 « 
 
 seem 
 
 * Vide Plate XII. Fig. i, 4, 5, and 6. 
 
UPON THE PULP. 
 
 seem to grow much in the same manner *, and the 
 ossified part of a Tooth would seem to have much the 
 same connexion with the pulp as a snail has with its 
 shell. 
 
 « 
 
 As the Tooth grows, its cavity becomes gradually 
 smaller, especially towards the point of the fang. In 
 
 tracing the formation of the fang of a Tooth, we 
 
 \ _ 
 
 hitherto have been supposing it to be single ; but where 
 there are two, or more, it is somewhat different, and 
 more complicated. 
 
 When the body of a Molares is formed, there is but 
 one general cavity in the body of the Tooth, from the 
 brim of which the ossification is to shoot, so as to form 
 two or three fangs f. If two only, then the opposite 
 parts of the brim of the cavity of the Tooth shoot across 
 where the Pulp adheres to the Jaw, meet in the middle, 
 and thereby divide the mouth of the cavity into two 
 openings J; and from the edges of these two openings 
 the two fangs grow §. 
 
 We often find that a distinct ossification begins in 
 the middle of the general cavity upon the root of the 
 
 N Pulp, 
 
 * Vide Plate XIII. Fig. i, 3, 3, or Fig. 
 
 + Vide Plate XIII. Fig. i, a a. 
 
 t Vide Plate XIII. Fig b. 
 
 $ Vide Plate XIII. Fig. c J e. 
 
OF THE OSSIFICATION OF A TOOTH 
 
 92 
 
 Pulp, and two processes coming from the opposite 
 edges of the bony shell join it; which answers the same 
 purpose. 
 
 When there are three fangs, we see three processes 
 coming from so many points of the brim of the cavity, 
 which meet in the centre, and divide the whole into 
 three openings*; and from these are formed the three 
 fangs f. We often find the fangs forked at their 
 points, especially in the Bicuspides . In this case, the 
 sides of the fang as it grows, come close together in 
 the middle, making a longitudinal groove on the out¬ 
 side ; and this union of the opposite sides divides the 
 mouth of the growing fang into two orifices, from 
 which the two points are formed. 
 
 By the observations which I have made in unravelling 
 the texture of the Teeth, when softened by an acid, 
 and from observing the disposition of the red parts in 
 the Tooth of growing animals interruptedly fed with 
 madder, I find that the bony part of a Tooth is formed 
 of Lamellae^ placed one within another. The outer 
 Lamella is the first formed, and is the shortest: the 
 more internal Lamellae lengthen gradually towards the 
 fang \ by which means, in proportion as the Tooth 
 
 grows 
 
 * Vide Plate XIII. Fig. f g. 
 t Vide XIII. Fig. b, i, A. 
 
( 
 
 UPON THE PULP, 4 i , . , 9 3 
 
 grows longer, its cavity grows smaller, and its sides 
 grow thicker*. 
 
 How the earthy and animal substance of the Tooth 
 is deposited on the surface of the Pulp, is not perhaps to 
 be explained. 
 
 * Vide Plate XII. Fig 7, 8. 
 
 ... ... , 3 
 
 
 
 N 2 
 
9\ 
 
 OF THE FORMATION. 
 
 OF THE 
 
 FORMATION of the ENAMEL. 
 
 In speaking of the Enamel, we postponed treating of 
 its Formation till it could be more clearly understood; 
 and now we shall previously describe some parts which 
 we apprehend to be subservient to its formation, much 
 in the same manner as the Pulp is to the body of the 
 Tooth. 
 
 From its situation, and from the manner in which 
 the Teeth grow, one would imagine that the Enamel is 
 first formed ; but the bony part begins first, and very 
 soon after the Enamel is formed upon it. There is 
 another pulpy substance opposite to that which we have 
 described: it adheres to the inside of the Capsula, 
 where the Gum is joined to it, and its opposite surface 
 lies in contact with the basis of the above-described 
 Pulp, and afterwards with the new-formed basis of the 
 Tooth : whatever eminences or cavities the one has, the 
 other has the same, but reversed ; so that they are 
 moulded exactly to each other, 
 
 ■ ' V 1 * " ' : " In 
 
OF THE ENAMEL. 
 
 9$ 
 
 In the Incisores it lies in contact not with the sharper 
 cutting edge of the Pulp, or Tooth, but against the 
 hollowed inside of the Tooth ; and in the Molares it is 
 placed directly against their base, like a Tooth of the 
 opposite Jaw. It is thinner than the other Pulp, and 
 decreases in proportion as the Teeth advance. It does 
 not seem to be very vascular. The best time for exami¬ 
 ning it, is in a Foetus of seven or eight months old. 
 
 In the granivorous animal, such as the horse, cow, 
 &c. whose Teeth have the Enamel intermixed with 
 the bony part*, and whose Teeth, when forming, have 
 as many interstices as there are continuations of the 
 Enamel, we find processes from the Pulp passing down 
 into those interstices as far as the Pulp which the Tooth 
 is formed from, and there coming into contact with it. 
 
 After the points of the first-described Pulp are begun 
 to ossify, a thin covering of enamel is spread over them, 
 which increases in thickness till some time before the 
 Tooth begins to cut the Gum. 
 
 The Enamel appears to be secreted from the Pulp 
 above described, and perhaps from the Capsula which 
 incloses the body of the Tooth. That it is from the 
 Pulp and Capsula, seems evident in the horse, ass, ox,, 
 
 sheep, ; 
 
 * Vide Plate XIV. Fig, 19, 20, 
 
I 
 
 §6 Or THE FORMATION 
 
 sheep, &c. therefore we have little reason to doubt of 
 it in the human species. It is a calcareous earth, pro- 
 bably dissolved in the juices of our body, and thrown 
 out from these parts which act here as a gland. • After 
 it is secreted, the earth is attracted, by the bony part 
 of the Tooth, which is already formed; and upon 
 that surface it crystallizes. 
 
 The operation is similar to the formation of the shell 
 of the egg, the stone in the kidneys and bladder, and 
 the gall-stone. This accounts for the striated crystal¬ 
 lized appearance which the Enamel has, when broken, 
 and also for the direction of these Stride *. 
 
 r I 'lE 
 
 The Enamel is thicker at the points and basis than at 
 the neck of the Teeth, which may be easily accounted 
 for from its manner of formation ; for, if we suppose it 
 to be always secreting, and laid equally over the whole 
 surface, as the Tooth grows, the Erst formed will 
 be the thickest; and the neck of the Tooth, which is 
 the last formed part inclosed in this Capsula, must have 
 the thinnest coat; and the fang, where the Periosteum 
 adheres, and leaves no vacant space, will have none of 
 the Enamel. 
 
 At 
 
 K - - 
 
 * The Author has made many experiments on the formation of different Calculi , 
 and finds they are formed by crystallization, which were communicated to his bro¬ 
 ther, and taught by him to his pupils in 1761, and which he proposes to give to the 
 
 | Public as soon as his time will permit* 
 
 [ g s 
 
 if 
 
 l[ 
 
OF THE ENAMEL. 
 
 - 
 
 97 
 
 At its first formation it is not very hard ; for by 
 
 exposing a very young Tooth to the air, the Enamel 
 
 cracks and looks rough: but by the time that the Teeth 
 
 cut the Gum, the Enamel seems to be as hard as ever it 
 
 is afterwards: so that the air seems to have no effect in 
 
 * 
 
 hardening it. 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OF' 
 
OF THE MANNER 
 
 OF THE 
 
 MANNER of SHEDDING of TEETH. 
 
 .An opinion has commonly prevailed, that the first 
 set of Teeth are pushed out by the second; this, 
 however, is very far from being the case: and were it 
 so, it would be attended with a very obvious incon¬ 
 venience ; for, were a Tooth pushed out by one under¬ 
 neath, that Tooth must rise in proportion to the growth 
 of the succeeding one, and stand in the same proportion 
 above the rest. But this circumstance never happens: 
 neither can it; for, the succeeding Teeth are formed 
 in new and distinct sockets, and, generally, the Incisores 
 and the Cuspidati of the second set, are situated on the 
 inside of the corresponding teeth of the first set *; and 
 we find, that in proportion to the growth of the suc¬ 
 ceeding Teeth, the fangs of the first set decay, till the 
 whole of the fang is so far destroyed, that nothing 
 remains but the neck, or that part of the fang to which 
 the Gum adheres f, and then the least force pushes the 
 Tooth out. It would be very natural to suppose, that this 
 
 was 
 
 * Vide Plate X. Fig. 2, 3. 
 
 t Vide Plate XV. which shews the gradual decay in the single and double Teeth, 
 ^nd also in one Grinder of a horse. 
 
OF SHEDDING OF TEETH. 
 
 99 
 
 was owing to a constant pressure from the rising Teeth 
 against the fangs or sockets of the first set: but it is 
 not so; for, the new Alveoli rise with the new Teeth, 
 and the old Alveoli decay in proportion as the fangs of 
 the old Teeth decay; and when the first set falls out, 
 the succeeding Teeth are so far from having destroyed, 
 by their pressure, the parts against which they might 
 be supposed to push, that they are still inclosed, and 
 covered by a complete bony socket. From this, we see 
 that the change is not produced by a mechanical 
 pressure, but is a particular process in the animal 
 ceconomy. 
 
 I have seen two or three Jaws where the second 
 temporary Grinders were shedding in the common way, 
 without any Tooth underneath; and in one Jaw, where 
 both the Grinders were shedding, I met with the same 
 circumstance. 
 
 A remarkable instance of this sort occurred to me in 
 a lady, who desired me to look at a loose Tooth, which 
 I found was the last temporary Tooth not yet shed. I 
 desired that it might be drawn out, and told her it was 
 of no use, and could not by any art be fixed, as it was 
 one of the Teeth that is naturally shed, and that 
 •another might come in its place: however she was 
 disappointed. 
 
 O 
 
 These 
 
100 
 
 OF THE MANNER, &e. 
 
 These cases prove evidently that, in shedding, the 
 first Teeth are not pushed out by the second set, but 
 that they grow loose, and fall out of their own accord. 
 That the succeeding Teeth have some influence on the 
 shedding of the temporary set, is proved by those very 
 cases; since, in one of the first mentioned, the person was 
 above twenty years of age, and in the other the lady was 
 thirty; and it is reasonable to believe, that the shedding 
 of these Teeth was so late in those instances, from the 
 want of the influence, whatever it is, of the new Teeth. 
 When the Incisores and Cuspidati of the new set are a 
 little advanced, but long before they appear through 
 their bony sockets, there are small holes leading to them 
 on the inside, or behind the temporary sockets and 
 Teeth ; and these holes grow larger and larger, till at 
 last the body of the Tooth passes quite through them. 
 
 OF 
 
 
 
GROWTH OF THE TWO JAWS. 
 
 As a knowledge of the manner in which the two 
 Jaws grow will lead to the better understanding the 
 shedding of the Teeth, and as the Jaws seem to differ, 
 in their manner of growing, from other bones, and 
 also vary according to the age, it will be here proper to 
 give some account of their growth. 
 
 In a Foetus three or four months old, we have 
 described the marks of four or five Teeth, which occupy 
 the whole length of the Upper Jaw, and all that part 
 of the Lower which lies before the Coronoid Process, 
 for the fifth Tooth is somewhat under that process*. 
 
 These five marks become larger, and the Jaw-bones 
 of course increase in all directions, but more consider¬ 
 ably backwards ; for. in a Foetus of seven or eight 
 months, the marks of six Teeth in each side of both 
 Jaws are to be observed, and the sixth seems to be in 
 the place where the fifth was; so that in these last four. 
 
 O 2 months 
 
 * Vide Plate VIII. Fig. i, 2. 
 
102 OF THE GROWTH OF THE TWO JAWS. 
 
 months the Jaw has grown in all directions, in propor¬ 
 tion to the increased size of the Teeth, and besides has 
 lengthened itself at its posterior end as much as the 
 whole breadth of the socket of that sixth Tooth *. 
 
 The Jaw still increases in all points till twelve months 
 after birth, when the bodies of all the six Teeth 
 are pretty well formed ; but it never after increases in 
 length between the symphysis and the sixth Tooth ; and 
 from this time, too, the Alveolar Process, which makes the 
 anterior part of the arches of both Jaws, never becomes 
 a section of a larger circle, whence the lower part of 
 a child’s face is flatter, or not so projecting forwards as 
 in the adult •!*. 
 
 After this time the Jaws, lengthen only at their poste¬ 
 rior ends; so that the sixth Tooth, which was under 
 the Coronoid Process in the Lower Jaw, and in the 
 tubercles of the Upper Jaw of the Foetus, is at last, viz., 
 in the eighth or ninth year, placed before these parts; and 
 then the seventh Tooth appears in the place which the 
 sixth occupied, with respect to the Coronoid Process, and 
 tubercle; and about the twelfth or fourteenth year, the 
 
 eighth 
 
 * Vide Plate VIII. Fig. 3,4, 5, 6, for the general increase of the Jaws, but more 
 particularly backwards. 
 
 t Vide Plate VIII, Fig. 7, for these facts. 
 
OF THE GROWTH OF THE TWO JAWS. 103 
 
 eighth Tooth is situated where the seventh was placed. 
 At the age of eighteen, or twenty, the eighth Tooth is 
 found before the Coronoid Process in the Lower Jaw, 
 and under, or somewhat before the tubercle in the 
 Upper Jaw, which tubercle is no more than a suc¬ 
 cession of sockets for the Teeth till they are completely 
 formed. 
 
 In a young child, the cavity in the temporal bone for 
 the articulation of the Jaw is nearly in a line with the 
 Gums of the Upper Jaw ; and for this reason the Con¬ 
 dyle of the Lower Jaw is nearly in the same line*; but 
 afterwards, by the addition of the Alveolar Process and 
 Teeth, the line of the Gums in the Upper Jaw descends 
 considerably below the articular cavity; and for that 
 reason the Condyloid Process is then lengthened in the 
 same proportion. 
 
 In old people, who have lost all their Teeth, the 
 articulation comes again into the same line with the 
 Gums of the Upper Jawf ; but in the Lower Jaw, the 
 Condyles cannot be diminished again for accommo¬ 
 dating it to the Upper; so that it necessarily projects 
 beyond the Gums of the Upper Jaw, at the fore part. 
 
 When 
 
 * Vide Plate VIII. Fig. n.. 
 t Vide Plate VIL 
 
104 OF THE GROWTH OF THE TWO JAWS. 
 
 When the mouth is shut, the projection of the Jaw at 
 the chin, fits the two Jaws to each other at that place 
 where the Grinders were situated, and where the strength 
 of mastication lies; but if the chin was not further from 
 the centre of motion than the Gums of the Upper Jaw, 
 at the fore part, the Jaws, in such people as have lost 
 all their Teeth, would meet in a point at the fore part, 
 like a pair of pinchers, and be at a considerable distance 
 
 behind*. I 
 
 ' 
 
 « Vide Plate VII. 
 
 THE 
 
THE 
 
 REASON FOR THE SHEDDING of the TEETH. 
 
 J\ S the shedding of the Teeth is a very singular 
 process in the animal ceconomy, many reasons have 
 been assigned for it; but these reasons have not carried 
 along with them that conviction which is desired. 
 Authors have not fully considered the appearances 
 which naturally explain themselves; nor have they 
 considered the advantages necessarily arising from the 
 size and construction of only such a number as the first 
 set; nor have they considered fully the disadvantages 
 that such size and construction would have, if continued 
 when it is necessary to have a greater number, which is 
 the case with the adult. 
 
 We shall consider these advantages in a child, where 
 the Shedding-Teeth are completely formed, which 
 will be setting them in the clearest point of light; and 
 also, the disadvantages that would occur, if, in the 
 adult, these were not changed for another set somewhat 
 different. 
 
 If 
 
106 
 
 THE REASON FOR THE SHEDDING 
 
 If the child had been so contrived as not to have re¬ 
 quired Teeth till the time of the second set’s appearing, 
 there would have been no occasion for a new set: but 
 thej aw-bones being considerably smaller in children than 
 in adults, and it being necessary that they should have 
 two Grinders, there is not room for Incisores and Cuspidati 
 of sufficient size to serve through life ; and the first 
 formed Grinders having necessarily too small fangs, and 
 the Jaw increasing at the back part only, these two 
 Grinders would have been protruded too far forwards, and 
 at too great a distance from the center of motion. This 
 variation in the size of the Teeth is likewise a reason 
 why the second set are not formed in the sockets of the 
 first, and why the old sockets are destroyed. 
 
 These circumstances, with regard to the shedding of 
 the Teeth, contradict the notion of the second set being 
 made broader and thicker, by the resistance they meet 
 with in pushing out the first. For were we, on a partial 
 view of the subject, to admit the supposition, th eBicus- 
 pides would effectually overturn our hypothesis; because 
 here the second set are much smaller than the first, and 
 yet the resistance would be greater to them than to the 
 Incisores. 
 
 From the manner in which the Teeth are shed, it is 
 evident that drawing a temporary Tooth, for the easier 
 
 protrusion 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 107 
 
 protrusion of the one underneath, will be of no great 
 service; for in general it falls out before the other can 
 touch it. But it is often of much more service to pull 
 out the neighbouring, or adjacent temporary Tooth ; 
 for we must be convinced, by what has been advanced 
 with regard to the changes in size, that, excepting the 
 whole were to shed at the same time, or the order of 
 shedding, viz. from before backwards, were to be 
 inverted, the second set of Incisores and Cuspidati must 
 be pinched in room, till the'Grinders are also shed; 
 and therefore we find it often of use to draw a tem¬ 
 porary Tooth, that is placed further back ; and it would 
 perhaps be right, upon the whole, always to draw at 
 least the first Grinder; and perhaps some time after, the 
 second Grinder also. 
 
 * 
 
108 
 
 OF THE CAVITY FILLING UP 
 
 OF THE 
 
 CAVITY FILLING UP AS THE TEETH WEAR DOWN. 
 
 A TOOTH very often wears down so low, that its 
 cavity would be exposed, if no other alteration were 
 produced in it. To prevent this, Nature has taken 
 care that the bottom part of the cavity should be filled 
 up by new matter, in proportion as the surface of the 
 Teeth is worn down. This new matter may be easily 
 known from the old; for when a Tooth has been worn 
 down almost to the neck, a spot may always be seen in 
 the middle, which is more transparent, and at the same 
 time of a darker colour (occasioned, in some measure, 
 by the dark cavity under it), and is generally softer 
 than the other*. Any person may be convinced of the 
 truth of these observations, by taking two Teeth of the 
 same class, but of very different ages, one just com¬ 
 pletely formed, the other worn down almost to its 
 
 # neck. In the last, he will observe the dark spot in the 
 centre; and if as much is cut off from the complete 
 
 Tooth 
 
 i « Vide Plate XIV. Fig. 24 , 25 . 
 
• AS THE TEETH WEAR DOWN. \()p 
 
 Tooth as hath been worn off* the old one, the cavity of 
 the young Tooth will be found cut through; and, on 
 examining the other, its cavity will be found filled up 
 below that surface. Now this observation contradicts 
 the idea of the hole, leading into the cavity of the Tooth, 
 being closed up; and what is still a further proof of it, 
 I have been able to inject vessels in the cavities of the 
 Teeth, in very old people, when the Alveolar Process 
 has been gone, and the Teeth very loose in the Gum. 
 
 Old people are often found to have very good sets of 
 Teeth, only pretty much worn down. The reason of 
 this is, that such people never had any disorder in their 
 Teeth, or Alveolar Processes, sufficient to occasion the 
 filling of one Tooth. For, if by accident one Tooth is 
 lost, the rest will necessarily fail in some degree, even 
 though they are sound, and likely to remain so, had 
 not this accident happened; and this weakening cause 
 is greater in proportion to the number that are lost. 
 From this observation, we see that the Teeth support 
 one another. 
 
 V 2 OF 
 
 / * 
 
 I 
 
110 
 
 OF THE CONTINUAL GROWTH 
 
 OF THE 
 
 CONTINUAL GROWTH of the TEETH, 
 
 It has been asserted, that the Teeth are continually 
 growing, and that the abrasion is sufficient to keep 
 them always of the same length ; but we find that they 
 grow at once to their full length, and that they gra¬ 
 dually wear down afterwards; and that there is not 
 even the appearance of their continuing to grow. The 
 Teeth would probably project a little farther out of the 
 Gum, if they were not opposed by those in the opposite 
 Jaw; for in young people, who had lost a Tooth be¬ 
 fore the rest had come to their full length, I have seen 
 the opposite Tooth project a little beyond the rest, 
 before they were at all worn down. It may be further 
 observed, that when a Tooth is lost, the opposite one 
 may project, from the disposition of the Alveolar 
 Process to rise higher, and fill up at the bottom 
 of the sockets; and the want of that natural pres¬ 
 sure seems to give that diposition to these processes, 
 which is best illustrated in those Teeth which are formed 
 deeper in their sockets than usual. As a proof that the 
 Teeth continue growing, it has been said that the space 
 
 of 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 Ill 
 
 of a fallen Tooth is almost filled up by the increased 
 thickness of the two adjacent Teeth, and the lengthening 
 of that which is opposite. There is an evident fallacy 
 in the case: either the observations have been made 
 upon such Jaws as above described, or the appearances 
 have not been examined with sufficient accuracy ; for 
 when the space appears to have become narrow by the 
 approximation of the two adjacent Teeth, it is not 
 owing to any increase of their breadth, but to their 
 moving from that side where they are well supported, 
 to the other side, where they are not. For this reason, 
 they get an inclined direction ; and I observe ic extends 
 to the several adjacent Teeth in a proportional less 
 degree, and affects those which are behind more than 
 those which are before the vacant space. 
 
 In the Lower Jaw the back Teeth are not fixed per¬ 
 pendicularly, but all inclined forward ; and the de¬ 
 pression of the Jaw increases this position : the action 
 of the Teeth, when thrown out of the perpendicular, 
 has also a tendency to increase that oblique direction, 
 as a pair of scissars, in cutting, pushes every thing for¬ 
 ward, or from the centre of motion : therefore this 
 alteration, I think, is most commonly observable in the 
 Lower Jaw. 
 
 t. 
 
 * Vide Plat^XVI. Fig s, b y c . 
 
 And 
 
OF THE CONTINUAL GROWTH 
 
 112 
 
 And that Teeth are not actually always growing in 
 breadth, must be obvious to every person who considers, 
 that in many people, through life, the Teeth stand so 
 wide from each other, that there are considerable spaces 
 between them ; which could not be the case, if they were 
 always growing in thickness. 
 
 We might add, too, that, according to the hypothesis, 
 the Dens Sapient ice should grow to an enormous size 
 backward, because there it has no check from pressure ; 
 and in people where the Dens Sapientice is wanting in 
 one Jaw, which is very common, it should grow to an 
 uncommon length in the opposite Jaw for the same 
 reason. But neither of these things happens. 
 
 I need hardly take notice, that when a Tooth has lost 
 its opposite, it will in time become really so much longer 
 than the rest, as the others grow shorter by abrasion ; 
 and I observe that the Tooth which is opposite to the 
 empty space, becomes in time not only longer for the 
 above-mentioned reason, but more pointed. The apex 
 falls into the void space, and the two sides are rubbed 
 away against the sides of the two approaching Teeth 
 next to that space* 
 
 The manner of their formation likewise shews that 
 Teeth cannot grow beyond a certain limited size. To 
 
 illustrate 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 113 
 
 illustrate this, I may observe, that I have often, in 
 the dead body of adults, found the left Cuspidatus 
 of the Upper Jaw, with its points scarcely protruding 
 out of the Alveolar Process, though the Tooth was 
 completely formed, and longer than the other by the 
 whole point, which in that other was worn away*. 
 This Tooth, at its first formation, had been deeper in 
 the Jaw than what is common; and after it had grown 
 to the ordinary size, it grew no longer, though it had 
 not the resistance of the opposite Teeth to set bounds 
 to its increase : yet commonly, in these cases, the Tooth 
 continues to project further and further through the 
 Gum; though this is not owing to its growing longer, 
 but to the socket filling up behind it, and thereby con¬ 
 tinuing to push it out by slow degrees. 
 
 * Vide Plate VIII. Fig. 8. 
 
 \ * , 
 
 OF 
 
OF THE 
 
 SENSIBILITY of TEETH. 
 
 The Teeth would seem to be very sensible ; for they 
 appear to be subject to great pain, and are easily and 
 quickly affected by either heat or cold. 
 
 We may presume, that the bony substance itself 
 is not capable of conveying sensations to the mind, 
 because it is worn down in mastication, and occasionally 
 worked upon by operators in living bodies, without 
 giving any sensation of pain in the part itself. 
 
 In the cavity of a Tooth it is well known that there 
 is exquisite sensibility; and it is likewise believed,^that 
 this is owing to the nerve in that cavity. This nerve 
 would seem to be more sensible than nerves are in 
 common, as we do not observe the same violent effects 
 from any other nerve in the body being exposed either 
 by wound or sore, as we do from the exposure of the 
 nerve of a Tooth. Perhaps the reason of the intenseness, 
 as well as the quickness of the sense of heat and cold in 
 the Teeth, may be owing to their communicating these 
 to the nerve sooner than any other part of the body. 
 
 OF 
 
1 . 
 
 O F 
 
 SUPERNUMERARY TEETH. 
 
 V •» 4.- ' \j . ' J 
 
 We often meet with Supernumerary Teeth ; and tliis^ 
 as well as some other variations, happens oftener in the 
 Upper than in the Lower Jaw, and, I believe, always 
 in the Incisores and Cuspidati . I have only met with 
 one instance of this sort, and it was in the Upper Jaw 
 of a child about nine months old: there were the 
 bodies of two Teeth, in shape like the Cuspidati , placed 
 directly behind the bodies of the two first permanent 
 Incisor es ; so that there were three Teeth in a row, 
 placed behind one another, viz. the temporary Incisor , 
 the body of the permanent Incisor , and that super¬ 
 numerary Tooth. The most remarkable circumstance 
 \ 
 
 was, that these Supernumerary Teeth were inverted, 
 their points being turned upwards, and bended by the 
 bone, which was above them, not giving way to their 
 growth, as the Alveolar Process does. 
 
 It often happens that the Incisores and Cuspidati , in the 
 Upper Jaw especially, are so irregularly placed, as to 
 give the appearance of a double row. I once saw a 
 remarkable instance of this in a boy; the second 
 
 CL 
 
 Incisor 
 
116 OF SUPERNUMERARY TEETH. 
 
 % 
 
 Incisor in each side was placed farther back than what is 
 common, and the Cuspidatus and first Incisor closer 
 together, than if the second Incisor had been directly 
 between them ; so that the appearance gave an idea of a 
 second row of Teeth. 
 
 This happens only in the adult set of Teeth, and is 
 owing to there not being room in the Jaw for this 
 second set, the Jaw-bone being formed with the first set 
 of Teeth, and never increasing afterwards; so that if 
 the adult set does not pass further back, they must 
 over-lap each other, and give the appearance of a second 
 row. 
 
 - °k l ***v*te gnxvi§ • 
 
 * * v • i r% - • 1 4.4* - -• - 4 fy ft I-? JlV * 
 
 y ‘' ,i " V 
 
' . J ; 
 
 
 
 
 ; 1 J j ' J y \ 
 
 ‘j ■ { : Vv 
 
 x ) \ \ (, , V 
 
 jt)ld ■ 
 
 I flj J 
 
 
 OF THE 
 
 USE OF THE TEETH, SO FAR as they affect 
 
 THE VOICE. 
 
 
 Ul 
 
 1 HE Teeth serve principally for mastication; and 
 that use need not be farther explained. 
 
 They serve likewise a secondary, or subordinate pur-* 
 pose ; giving strength and clearness to the sound of the 
 voice, as is evident from the alteration produced in 
 speaking, when the Teeth are lost. 
 
 This alteration, however, may not depend entirely 
 upon the Teeth, but, in some measure, on the other 
 organs of the voice having been accustomed to them; and 
 therefore, when they are gone, those other organs may 
 be put out of their common play, and may not be able to 
 adapt themselves so well to this new instrument. Yet 
 I believe that habit, in this case, has no great effect; 
 for those people seldom or never get the better of 
 the defect; and young children, who are shedding 
 their Teeth, and are, perhaps, without any Fore Teeth 
 for half a year or more, always have that defect in their 
 
 CL* voice 
 
118 OF THE USE OF THE TEETH, &c. 
 
 voice till the new Teeth come; and as these grow, the 
 voice becomes clear again. 
 
 This use seems to be entirely in the Fore Teeth; for 
 the loss of one of these makes a great alteration, and 
 the loss of two or three Grinders seems to have no 
 sensible effect. As an argument for the use of the Teeth 
 in modifying the sound of the voice, we may observe, 
 that the Fore Teeth come at a time when the child 
 begins to articulate sounds, and at that time they are so 
 loose in the gums, that they can be of very little service 
 in mastication. 
 
 Every defect in speech, arising from this defect in 
 the organ, is generally attended with what we call a 
 lisp. People who have lost all their Teeth, and most old 
 people, for that reason, lose in a great measure their 
 voice. This arises partly from the loss of the Fore 
 Teeth, but principally from the loss of all the Teeth, and 
 of the Alveolar Processes of both Jaws, by which means 
 the mouth becomes too small lor the tongue, and the 
 lips and cheeks become flaccid ; insomuch, that the nicer 
 movements of these parts, in the articulation of sounds, 
 are obstructed ; and thence the words and syllables are 
 indistinctly pronounced, and slurred, or run into one 
 another. 
 
 Under 
 
t 
 
 Under what CLASS do the HUMAN TEETH 
 
 COME? 
 
 v# • t * i \ * * ► v t » » * r ■■ 
 
 ' ■ » _ . «'' . . T ; V „ i .. .% . • » 
 
 Natural Historians have been at great pains to 
 prove from the Teeth, that man is not a carnivorous 
 animal ; but in this, as in many other things, they have 
 not been accurate in their definitions ; nor have they 
 determined what a carnivorous animal is. 
 
 If they mean an animal that catches and kills his 
 prey with his Teeth, and eats that flesh of the prey just 
 as it is killed, they are in the right ; man is not in this 
 sense a carnivorous animal, and therefore he has not 
 Teeth like those of a Lion ; and this, I presume, is 
 what they mean. 
 
 But if their meaning were, that the Human Teeth 
 are not fitted for eating meat that has been catched, 
 killed, and dressed by art, in all the various ways that 
 the superiority of the human mind can invent, they 
 are in the wrong.. Indeed, v from this confined way of 
 thinking, it would be hard to say what the human 
 Teeth are fitted for; because, by the same reasoning, 
 man is not a graminivorous animal, as his Teeth are 
 not fitted for pulling vegetable food, &c„ They are 
 not made like those of cows or horses 55 for example. 
 
 The 
 
 / 
 
120 CLASS OF THE HUMAN TEETH. 
 
 The light in which we ought to view this subject is, 
 that man is a more perfect or complicated animal than 
 any other; and is not made like others, to come at his 
 food by his Teeth, but by his hands, directed by his 
 superior ingenuity; the Teeth being given only for the 
 purpose of chewing the food, in order to its more easy 
 digestion: and they, as well as his other organs of 
 digestion, are fitted for the conversion of both animal 
 and vegetable substances into blood; and thence he is 
 able to live in a much greater variety of circumstances' 
 than any other animal, and has more opportunities of 
 exercising the faculties of his mind. He ought, there¬ 
 fore, to be considered as a compound, fitted equally to 
 live upon flesh and upon vegetables. 
 
 f-sfo W tv- - » T f ! 1 ifiiw bA ^fqooq 
 
 Ak orii 
 
 01 . 
 
 j ^ - 
 J O- 
 
 cj P c, ,i ■ • •{ • . j 11 y. ■ 
 
 
 
 )on on x 
 
 X 'J * f ■ ! ■ 
 
 >1 Doq? 03 i FJ V 
 
 r Ti t | : , ,. 
 
 iiW '2fU 
 
 ::xl 
 
 j Oil 0. 3? 
 
 t s k * * * - 
 
 / ' > I " ^ 
 
 rii no vl hr 
 
 
 0 ‘ 21 252 V 
 
 \ - .— r r p. f rvi 
 
 , I '31L. 'j’iU J 
 
 5 . ' 
 
 orit oJni 
 
 o no o*l 
 
 aurirriw/i ' 
 
 
 raro&A ;nwon, 
 
 c 
 
 ^ » r '•‘lA 4 \ 1/ t ' fri s i 
 
 «; 00' O • 0: "■ : 
 
 f] 0 Di 
 
 I.Ij,' t i Y }y -.J Jf XJ \ Jt J- 4--* 0 
 
 y j > ; . i i ] i 
 
 
 3fi QO02 -:A 
 
 
 V ' +* v -* 
 
ek 1 
 
 OF THE 
 
 DISEASES of the TEETH. 
 
 ’ k 
 
 
 1 H E Teeth are subject to diseases as well as other 
 parts of the body. Whatever the disorder is that affects 
 them, it is generally attended with pain ; and from 
 this indeed we commonly first know that they are 
 affected. 
 
 Pain in the Teeth proceeds, I believe, in a great 
 measure from the air coming into contact with the 
 nerve in the cavity of the Tooth ; for we seldom see 
 people affected with the Tooth-ach, but when the 
 cavity is exposed to the air. 
 
 It is not easy to say by what means the cavity comes 
 to be exposed. 
 
 The most common disease to which the Teeth are 
 subject, begins with a small, dark-coloured speck, gene¬ 
 rally on the side of the Tooth where it is not exposed 
 to pressure; from what cause this arises is hitherto 
 unknown. The substance of the Tooth thus discoloured, 
 gradually decays, and an opening is made into* the' 
 cavity. As soon as the air is thereby admitted, a- 
 
 considerable 
 
122 
 
 OF THE DISEASES OF THE TEETH. 
 
 considerable degree of pain arises, which is probably 
 owing to the admission of the air, as it may be pre¬ 
 vented by filling the cavity with lead, wax, &c. This 
 pain is not always present ; the food, and other sub¬ 
 stances, perhaps fill up the hole occasionally, and prevent 
 the access of the air, and of consequence the pain, 
 during the time they remain in it. When an opening 
 is made into the cavity of the Tooth, the inside 
 begins to decay, the cavity becomes larger, the breath 
 at the same time often acquires a putrid Feet or , the bone 
 continues to decay till it is no longer able to support 
 the pressure of the opposite Tooth ; it breaks and lays 
 the cavity open. We have not as yet found any means 
 of preventing this disease, or of curing it; all that can 
 be done, is to fill the hole with lead,, which prevents the 
 pain, and retards the decay ; but after the Tooth is 
 broken, this is not practicable : and for that reason it is 
 then best to extract it. 
 
 It would be best of all to attempt the extraction of 
 a Tooth by drawing it in the direction of its axis: but 
 that not being practicable by the instruments at present 
 
 in use, which pull laterally, it is the next best to draw 
 
 \ 
 
 a Tooth to that side where the Alveolar Process is 
 weakest ; which is the inside, in the two last grinders 
 on each side of the Lower Jaw, and the outside in all 
 the others. 
 
 n: It 
 
 i 
 
123 
 
 OF THE DISEASES OF THE TEETH. 
 
 It generally happens, in drawing a Tooth, that 
 the Alveolar Process is broken, particularly when the 
 Grinders are extracted ; but this is attended with no 
 bad consequences, as that part of the Alveolar Process 
 from which the Tooth was extracted, always decays^ 
 
 In drawing a Tooth, the patient complains of a 
 disagreeable jarring noise, which always happens when 
 any thing grates against the bones of the head. 
 
 4 
 
 R OF 
 
 4 - 
 
3 7. l 
 
 
 OF 
 
 CLEANING the TEETH. 
 
 llJi nj 
 
 what was said of the nature and use of the 
 Enamel, it is evident, that whatever is capable of 
 destroying it, must be hurtful; therefore all acids, 
 gritty powders, and injudicious methods of scaling the 
 Teeth, are prejudicial: but simply scaling the Teeth* 
 that is, clearing them of the stony concretions which 
 frequently collect about their necks, while nothing is 
 scraped off but that adventitious substance, is proper 
 and useful. If not removed by art, the quantity of the 
 stony matter is apt to increase, and to affect the gum. 
 This matter first begins to form on the Tooth near to 
 the Gum; but not in the very angle, because the 
 motion of the Gum commonly prevents the accumula¬ 
 tion of it at this part. I have seen it cover not only 
 the whole Tooth, but a great part of the Gum : in this 
 case there is always an accumulation of a very putrid 1 
 matter, frequently considerable tenderness and ulcera¬ 
 tion* 
 
 / 
 
OF CLEANING' THE TEETH. 
 
 125 
 
 tion of the Gum, and scaling becomes absolutely 
 necessary*. 
 
 * The animal fluids, when out of the course of the general circulation, especially 
 when they stagnate in cavities, are apt to deposit an absorbent earth, and form 
 concretions. This earth is sometimes contained in the fluids, and is only deposited, 
 as in the formation of the stone in the urinary passages: in some cases, perhaps, the 
 fluids undergo a change, by which the earth is first formed, and afterwards deposited. 
 This deposition takes place particularly in weakened parts, or where the circulation 
 is languid, or where there are few arteries, such as about joints and tendons ; as if 
 it were intended to strengthen these parts, if they should at anytime give way; for 
 if an artery, for instance, is overcome by the action of the heart, and unnaturally 
 dilated, its coats have commonly these concretions formed every where in their 
 interstices. The same thing happens also in the coats of incysted tumors, which 
 are constantly distended j in cases of distentions of the Tunica Vaginalis Testis, See. 
 It is also apt to take place in parts which have lost their natural functions ; as in the 
 coats of the eye, in cases of blindness, and in diseased lymphatic glands, &c. and 
 where the living power is diminished in the system, as in the arteries, membranes, Sc c. 
 of old people ; and in some particular habits, as in those who are affected by the 
 gout. , 
 
 The same sort of deposition takes place likewise where there is any substance 
 with such properties as render it a fit Basis for crystallization ; as when extraneous 
 bodies are lodged in the bladder : whence such bodies are so often found to form the 
 Nucleus of a stone. The same thing happens in the bowels of many animals j 
 whence the Nucleus of intestinal concretions, or bezoars, is commonly a nail, or 
 some indigestible substance which had been swallowed. The crust, which collects 
 upon the Teeth, seems to be a crystallization of the same nature. 
 
 R 2 OF 
 
 _ , t L nc ft t s' 
 
 ^ A * \ < A « t.-'-j /*. it & 4 * i J . \ A * • , ♦ • < i <l i ^ 
 
 A.) 
 
O F 
 
 -y - , . ' t 
 
 TRANSPLANTING the TEETH. 
 
 From considering the almost constant variety of 
 the size and shape of the same class of Teeth in 
 different people, it would appear almost impossible to 
 find the Tooth of one person that should fit, with any 
 degree of exactness, the socket of another ; and this 
 observation is supported, and indeed would seem to be 
 proved, by observing the Teeth in skeletons. Yet we can 
 actually transplant a Tooth from one person to another, 
 without great difficulty, Nature assisting the operation, 
 if it is done in such a way that she can assist; and the 
 only way in which Nature can assist, with respect either 
 to size or shape, is by having the fang of the transplanted 
 Tooth rather smaller than the socket. The socket in 
 this case grows to the Tooth. If the fang is too large, 
 it is impossible indeed to insert it at all in that state ; 
 however, if the fang should be originally too large, it 
 may be made less; and this seems to answer the purpose 
 as well- 
 
 ± > j, J j J ,* j i, x 
 
 The success of this operation is founded on a dispo¬ 
 sition in all living substances to unite when brought 
 
 into 
 
I 
 
 OF TRANSPLANTING THE TEETH. \oj 
 
 into contact with one another, although they are of a 
 different ftructure ; and even although the circula¬ 
 tion is only carried on in one of them. 
 
 This disposition is not so considerable in the more per¬ 
 fect or complex animals, such as quadrupeds, as it is in 
 the more simple or imperfect; nor in old animals, as in 
 young: for the living principle in young animals, and 
 those of simple construction, is not so much confined 
 to, or derived from one part of the body; so that it con¬ 
 tinues longer in a part separated from their bodies, and 
 even would appear to be generated in it for some time; 
 while a part, separated from an older or more perfect 
 animal, dies sooner,, and would appear to have its life 
 entirely dependent on the body from which it was 
 taken. 
 
 Taking off the young spur of a cock, and fixing it to 
 his comb, is an old and well-known experiment. 
 
 I have also frequently taken out the Teftis of a cock 
 and replaced it in his belly, where it has adhered, and 
 has been nourished; nay, I have put the Teftis. of a cocL 
 into the belly of a hen with the same effect. 
 
 In like manner, a fresh Tooth, when transplanted 
 from one socket to another, becomes to all appearance 
 
 . ' d part. 
 
128 OF TRANSPLANTING THE TEETH. 
 
 a part of that body to which it is now attached, as 
 much as it was of the one from which it was taken; 
 while a Tooth which has been extracted for some time, 
 so as to lose the whole of its life, will never become 
 firm or fixed; the sockets will also in this case acquire 
 the disposition to fill up, which they do not in the case 
 of the insertion of a fresh Tooth. 
 
 ITA K AT■ 
 
 These appearances shew that the living principle 
 exists in the several parts of the body, independent of the 
 influence of the brain, or circulation, and that it subsists 
 by these, or is indebted to them for its continuance; and in 
 proportion as animals have less of brain and circulation, 
 the living power has less dependence on them, and 
 becomes a more active principle in itself; and in many 
 animals there is no brain nor circulation; so that this 
 power is capable of being continued equally by all the 
 parts themselves, such animals being nearly similar in 
 this respect to vegetables. 
 
 END OF PART I. 
 
PRACTICAL TREATISE 
 
 ON THE 
 
 Ifg ^ * JflL cftotoiikioiij to f ni£id jiflt io oan^ufi 
 
 ISEASES OF THE TEETH 
 
 r.jfr^\ V*rt /*, J 1 f 5 
 
 biujiij i)iih mma 10 wm £i£xnini> £i* noitoonry 
 
 • . • AXV *V'VV/ 
 
 INTENDED AS A 
 
 t ' XII XH1J5 1 LU? T ill ■. > jV flop 4 Vrf’»m r jqmAn* 
 
 SUPPLEMENT, or SECOND PART, 
 
 A-.^ T . •> • ’ ; C ' 
 
 TO THE PRECEDING 
 
 NATURAL HISTORY. 
 
k. . ** 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' * 
 
 > • 
 
 
 
 
 QVToiag 3HT THA3 30 aTfCTTftO^ 
 
 <- 
 
 ■**■ jr- /■*% 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 m - 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 ' • ct i 
 
 
 
 
 HU 
 
 
 . 6*di 
 
 * 
 
 " . i 
 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 . : " J ' ' YU 
 
 ’ 
 
 madt/lo «aan 
 
 ; >jj .nwniJitnl to anioicjfriv? 
 
 - AibdV 9fli *<> $n«fq* 
 
 .^(l vd **° ’ odT~~.11 
 
 k . „ * ... U . noasbon . 
 
 i i.AllD 
 
 
 » » ■ 
 
 . ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 mil oi 
 
 
 
 
 A -■' * 
 
 * 
 
 
 ll\. \ hiii> 
 
 . '' 4 : i'- a: 
 
 - 
 
 \ - os 
 
 ■ 
 
 . 
 
 ■ 
 
 - < 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
CONTENTS OF PART THE SECOND. 
 
 Page 
 
 Chap. I. v/F the Diseases of the Teeth, and the Con- 
 
 sequences of them. 
 
 Sect. I.—The Decay of the Teeth, arising 
 from Rottenness -------- 335 
 
 Symptoms of Inflammation - - 143 
 
 Stopping of the Teeth - - - - 132 
 
 - 
 
 Sect. II.—The Decay of the Teeth, by De¬ 
 nudation ---------- 153 
 
 Sect. III.—Swelling of the Fang - - - 158 
 
 Sect. IV.—Gum-Biles - - ----- - 160 
 
 Sect. V.—Excrescences from the the Gum 109 
 Sect. VI.—Deeply-seated Abscesses in the 
 Jaws ----------- 1?1 
 
 ' /W O ■ ♦ • 
 
 Sect. VII. — Abscess of the Antrum Mciiillare 174 
 Chap. II. Of the Diseases of the Alveolar Processes, 
 
 and the Consequences of them - - - 177 
 
 Chap. III. Of the Diseases of the Gums, and the Con¬ 
 sequences of them. 
 
 Sect. I.—The Scurvy in the Gums, vulgarly 
 
 so called - -- -- -- - -'-181 
 
 Sect. II.—Callous Thickenings of the Gums 188 
 Chap. IV. Of Nervous Pains in the Jaws - - - - 190 
 
 Chap. V. Of the Extraneous Matter upon the Teeth 192 
 
 Chap. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap. VI. Of the Irregularity of the Teeth - - - - 198 
 
 Chap. VII. Of Irregularities between the Teeth and Jaw 207 
 
 Of Supernumerary Teeth ------ 208 
 
 Chap. VIII. Of the Under Jaw - -- -- -- - 20 9 
 Chap. IX. Of Drawing the Teeth - -- -- --211 
 
 Transplanting Teeth -------217 
 
 Of the State of the Gums and Sockets - * 218 
 
 Of the Age of the Person who is to have the 
 Scion Tooth - -- -- - - - - 220 
 
 Of the Scion Tooth - - - - - - 4 - -221 
 
 Of replacing a Sound Tooth when drawn by 
 Mistake ---------- 224 
 
 Of Transplanting a Dead Tooth - - - - 226* 
 
 Of the immediate Fastening of a Trans¬ 
 planted Tooth - -- -- -- - ibid. 
 
 Chap. X. Of Dentition - -- -- -- -- - 234 
 
 Of the Cure - -- -- -- -- - 239 
 
 Of cutting the Gums ------- 240 
 
 Cases - -- -- -- -- -- - 244 
 
 \ 
 
 i 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Th E importance of the Teeth is such, that they 
 
 deserve our utmost attention, as well with respect to 
 the preservation of them, when in a healthy state, 
 
 as to the methods ot curing them, when diseased. 
 
 ■j tv id rranw n jl a* jk!Q3 *. 1 .\j 
 
 They require this attention, not only for the preserva¬ 
 tion of themselves, as instruments useful to the body, 
 but also on account of other parts with which they are 
 connected; for diseases in the Teeth are apt to produce 
 diseases in the neighbouring parts, frequently of very 
 serious consequences; as will evidently appear in the 
 following Treatise. 
 
 One might, at first, imagine that the diseases of the 
 Teeth must be very simple, and like those which 
 take place every where else in the bony parts of our 
 body; but experience shews the contrary. The Teeth 
 being singular in their structure and some other circum- 
 
 S stances, 
 
in 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 stances, have diseases peculiar to themselves. These 
 diseases, considered abstractedly, are indeed very simple; 
 but by the relations which the Teeth bear to the body 
 in general, and to the parts with which they are imme¬ 
 diately connected, they become extremely complicated. 
 The diseases which may arise in consequence of those of 
 the Teeth, are various; such as Abscesses, Carious Bones* 
 &c.; many of which, although proceeding originally 
 from the Teeth, are more the object of the Surgeon than 
 of the Dentist, who will find himself as much at a loss* 
 in such cases, as if the Abscess or Carious Bone were in* 
 the leg, or any other distant part. All the diseases of 
 the Teeth, which are common to them with the other- 
 parts of the body, should be put under the manage¬ 
 ment of the Physician or Surgeon ; but those which are 
 peculiar to the Teeth, and their connexions, belong 
 properly to the Dentist. 
 
 i 
 
 it is not my present purpose to enumerate every 
 disease capable of producing such symptoms as may 
 
 lead us to suspect the Teeth ; for the Jaws may be. 
 
 affected; 
 
tifTRO 0UCTI ON* j 33, 
 
 affected by almost every kind of disorder* I shall 
 therefore confine myself to the diseases of the Teeth, 
 Gums, and Alveolar Processes; which parts having a 
 peculiar connexion, their diseases fall properly within 
 the province of the Dentist. I shall also purposely 
 avoid entering into common Surgery; not to lead the 
 Dentist beyond his depth, and to matters of which it 
 is to be supposed he has not acquired a competent 
 knowledge. 
 
 In order that the reader may perfectly understand 
 what follows, it will be necessary for him previously 
 to consider and comprehend the anatomy and uses 
 of every part of a Tooth, as explained in my Natural 
 History of the Human Teeth , to which I shall be obliged 
 frequently to refer. Without such previous study, 
 the Dentist will often be at a loss to account for many 
 of the diseases and symptoms mentioned here, and will 
 retain many vulgar errors imbibed by conversing with 
 ignorant people, or by reading books in which the 
 
 .S 2 anatomy 
 
134 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 anatomy and physiology of the Teeth are treated with¬ 
 out a sufficient knowledge of the subject. . 
 
 % 
 
 Whichever of the connected parts be originally diseased, 
 the Teeth are commonly the greatest sufferers. None 
 of those parts can be distempered, without communi¬ 
 cating to the Teeth such morbid effects, as tend to the 
 destruction of them. 
 
 PART 
 
PART THE SECOND. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of the Diseases of the Teeth, and the Consequences of them . 
 
 SECT. I. 
 
 THE DECAY OF THE TEETH, ARISING FROM ROTTENNESS. 
 
 The most common disease to which the Teeth are 
 exposed, is such a decay as would appear to deserve 
 the name of mortification. But there is something 
 more ; for the simple death of the part would produce 
 but little effect, as we find that Teeth are not subject 
 to putrefaction after death ; and therefore I am apt to 
 suspect, that, during life, there is some operation going 
 on which produces a change in the diseased part. It 
 almost always begins externally in a small part of the 
 body of the Tooth, and commonly appears at first as 
 an opaque white spot. This is owing to the Enamel’s 
 
136 
 
 d ¥ 1 THE DISEASES 
 
 fi !. Vj YB vV 
 
 "3 
 
 losing its regular and crystallized texture, and being 
 .reduced to a state of powder, from the attraction of 
 cohesion being destroyed ; which produces similar effects 
 to those of powdered crystal. When this has crumbled 
 away, the ; bony part of the Tooth is exposed ; and 
 when the- disease has attacked this part, it generally 
 appears like a dark brown speck. Sometimes how¬ 
 ever there is no change of colour, and therefore 
 the disease is not observable till it has made a con- 
 
 ■N - V 
 
 siderable hole in the Tooth. The dead part is gene¬ 
 rally at first round, but not always ; its particular 
 figure depending more on the place where it begins, 
 than on any other circumstance. It is often observed 
 on the hollow parts of the grinding surface of the 
 Molares , and there looks like a crack filled with a very 
 black substance. In the Incisors, the disease usually 
 begins pretty near the neck of the Tooth ; and the 
 scooping process goes on enlarging the cavity, com¬ 
 monly across the same part of the Tooth, which almost 
 divides it into two. When such a diseased Tooth 
 give way, the mischief is occasioned by its body 
 breaking off 
 
 When it attacks the bony part, it appears first to 
 destroy the earth, for the bone becomes softer and 
 softer, and is at last so soft on the exterior exposed sur¬ 
 face, 
 
137 
 
 OF THE TEETH, 
 
 face, that it can be picked away with a pin, and when 
 allowed to dry, it cracks like dried clay. 
 
 It begins sometimes in the inside of the Tooth, 
 although but rarely. In this case the Tooth becomes of 
 a shining black, from the dark colour being seen through 
 the remaining shell of the Tooth, and no hole is found; 
 leading into the cavity.. 
 
 This blackness is seldom more than a portion of the 
 bony part decayed or mortified. However, it often 
 happens,, that the remaining part of the Tooth; 
 becomes simply dead ; in which state it is capable 
 of taking on a dye. As it is* generally on the external 
 
 surface, one might expect no great mischief would 
 
 ■ — — . 
 
 ensue; but the tendency to mortification goes deeper 
 and deeper, til.L at last it arrives at the cavity of the 
 Tooth, and the mortification follows. Mortification is 
 common to every part of the body: but in most other 
 parts, this tendency is owing in a great measure to the 
 constitution,, which being corrected, that disposition- 
 ceases ; but here it is local, and as such it would appear 
 that we have no power of resisting it. When gone 
 thus far, the decay makes a quicker progress, similar 
 to those cases where the decay begins in the cavity; 
 for then this disposition is given to the whole cavity of 
 the Tooth, which being a much larger surface than what 
 
 the.: 
 
OF THE DISEASES 
 
 13$ 
 
 the disease had before to act upon, the increase of the 
 decay seems to be in the same proportion : at last it 
 scoops out its inner substance, till almost nothing is left 
 but a thin shell, which, generally, being broken by mas¬ 
 tication, a smaller or larger opening is made, and the 
 whole cavity becomes at length exposed. 
 
 The canal in the fang of the Tooth is more slowly 
 affected : the scooping process appears to stop there, for 
 we seldom know a Fang become very hollow to its point, 
 when in the form of a stump ; and it sometimes appears 
 sound, even when the body of the Tooth is almost 
 destroyed: hence I conclude, that the Fang of the 
 Tooth has greater living powers than the Body, by 
 which the process of the disease is retarded, and this 
 part appears at last only to lose its living principle, and 
 not to take on the mortifying process above described; 
 for which reason it remains simply a dead Fang : how¬ 
 ever it does not remain perfectly at rest. 
 
 This is the stage in which it is called a Stump. It 
 begins now to lose its sensibility, and is seldom afterwards 
 the cause of pain. 
 
 Thus, in appearance, it will remain sometimes for 
 many years, but there will be more' or less of a 
 change going on: Nature will be attempting to make 
 
00 3inu NO' 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 F 
 
 
 / I 
 
1 40 
 
 OF THE DISEASES 
 
 yet in many cases the part which is already rotten, 
 seems to have some influence upon that which remains; 
 for if the rotten part be perfectly removed before it has 
 arrived at the canal of the Tooth, a stop is sometimes put 
 to the farther progress of the decay, at least for a time. 
 
 However this is not constantly so ; it is oftener the 
 contrary: but it is expedient in most cases to make this 
 trial, as it is always right to keep a Tooth clean, and 
 free from specks. 
 
 This decay of the Teeth does not seem to be so 
 entirely the effect of accident as might be imagined; for 
 it sometimes takes place in them by pairs, in which case 
 we may suppose it owing to an original cause coming 
 into action at its stated time, the corresponding Teeth 
 being in pairs, with respect to the disease, as well as 
 to situation, shape, &c. 
 
 This opinion is somewhat strengthened by the fore 
 Teeth in the Lower Jaw not being so subject to decay 
 as those in the Upper, although equally liable to all 
 accidents arising from external influence, which could 
 produce the disease in general. 
 
 The Fore Teeth in the Lower Jaw appear to be less 
 .subject to this disease than any of the others ; the Fore 
 
 Tc;eth 
 
 
OF THE TEETH.' ' Hi 
 
 i 
 
 Teeth in the Upper Jaw, and the Grinders in both, are 
 of course more frequently affected. 
 
 This disease and its consequences seem to be peculiar 
 to youth and middle age; the shedding Teeth. are as 
 subject to it, if not more so, than those intended to 
 last through life: and we seldom or ever see any 
 person, whose Teeth begin to rot after the age of fifty 
 years. 
 
 This might be supposed to arise from the dispropor¬ 
 tion that the number of Teeth, after fifty, bear to them 
 before it; but the number of diseased Teeth after fifty 
 do not bear the same proportion. 
 
 This disease has not hitherto been accounted for; if 
 it had been always on the inside of the cavity, it might 
 have been supposed to be owing to a deficiency of 
 nourishment, from some fault in the vascular system ; 
 but as it begins most commonly externally, in a part 
 where the Teeth in their most sound state receive little 
 or no nourishment, we cannot refer it to that cause. 
 
 It does not arise from any external injury, or from 
 menstrua, which have a power of dissolving part of a 
 Tooth; for any thing of that kind could not act so 
 partially : and we can observe in those Teeth where the 
 
 T 2 disease 
 
I 
 
 142 OF THE DISEASES- 
 
 disease has not' gone deep, that from the black speck 
 externally there is a gradual decay or alteration leading 
 to the cavity, and becoming fainter and fainter. We may 
 therefore reasonably suppose, that it is a disease arising 
 originally in the Tooth itself ; because, when once the 
 shell of the Tooth has given way to the cavity, the cavity 
 itself soon becomes diseased in the same way. That 
 the disease spreads thus rapidly over the cavity, as soon 
 as the Tooth has given way, does not depend simply 
 on the exposure; for if a sound Tooth be broken by 
 accident, so as to expose the cavity, no such quick decay 
 ensues: however, sometimes we find in those cases, 
 that exposure of the cavity will produce a decay, and 
 even pain, similar to an original disease; and in the 
 diseased Tooth we find that the exposure has a consider¬ 
 able effect in hastening the progress of the disease; for 
 if the Tooth-be stopped so as to prevent its exposure'to 
 external injury, its cavity will not nearly so soon become 
 diseased. Exposure therefore seems at least to assist 
 the decay. 
 
 > * »• * 
 
 Flow far a rotten Tooth has the power of contami¬ 
 nating those next to it, I believe, is not yet completely 
 ascertained ; some cases seem to favour this idea, and 
 many to contradict it. We frequently see two Teeth 
 rotten in places exactly opposite to each other, and as 
 one of them began first to decay, it gives a suspicion 
 
 that 
 
OF THE TEETH, 
 
 143. 
 
 that the last diseased was infected by that which received 
 the first morbid impression. 
 
 On the contrary9 we often see one diseased, whilst 
 another Tooth, in contact with the decayed part, re¬ 
 mains perfectly sound. 
 
 SYMPTOMS of INFLAMMATION, 
 
 FEW or no symptoms are produced by this disease, 
 besides the above appearances, till the cavity of he 
 Tooth is exposed; however, it often happens that a 
 tenderness, or a soreness upon touch, or other external 
 influences, takes place long before; but when the 
 cavity is exposed, then pain and other symptoms often 
 begin, which are generally very considerable: however, 
 the exposure of the cavity of a Tooth, does not in all 
 cases give pain. Some Teeth shall moulder wholly away, 
 without ever having any sensation. 
 
 In many cases there will be very acute pain upon, 
 the cavity being exposed, which will subside, and recur 
 again, without producing any other effect; but it more 
 frequently happens, that this pain is the first symptom 
 of inflammation, and is in most cases very, considerable; 
 
 more. 
 
OF THE DISEASES 
 
 more so than that arising from such an inflammation 
 in other places. The surrounding parts sympathize 
 commonly to a considerable extent, viz. the Gums, Jaw¬ 
 bones, and integuments covering them ; they inflame 
 and swell so much as to affect the whole of that side of 
 the face where the affected Tooth is situated. The 
 mouth can hardly be opened ; the glands of that side 
 of the neck often swell ; there is an increase of the 
 saliva ; and the eye is almost closed ; the Tooth not 
 giving way to the swelling of the soft parts within it; 
 and for this reason, the local effects of the Inflammation 
 cannot be so visible as in the soft parts. 
 
 This inflammation of the Tooth often lasts a consider¬ 
 able time, and then gradually subsides. We may sup¬ 
 pose, according to the general law of inflammation, 
 that it is at first of the adhesive kind, and accordingly 
 we sometimes find the Teeth swelled at their ends, 
 which is a character of the adhesive stage of inflamma¬ 
 tion ; and sometimes two fangs are grown together. 
 That we seldom find adhesions between the Teeth and 
 surrounding parts, may be reasonably imputed to their 
 less aptitude for such connexions. The suppurative 
 inflammation succeeds; but as a Tooth has not that 
 power of suppuration which leads to granulations, so 
 as to be buried, covered up, and made part of ourselves, 
 as happens to other bones (which would destroy any 
 
 use 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 145 
 
 use of a Tooth), the inflammation wears out, or rather 
 the parts not being susceptible of this irritation, beyond 
 a certain time, the inflammation gradually goes off*, 
 and leaves the Tooth in its original diseased state. No 
 permanent cure therefore can possibly be effected by such 
 inflammations ; but the parts being left in the same state 
 as before, they are still subject to repetitions of inflam¬ 
 mation, till some change takes place, preventing future 
 attacks, which I believe is generally, if not always, 
 effected by the destruction of those parts which are the 
 seat of it, viz. the soft parts within the Tooth* 
 
 Nature seems, in some measure, to have considered 
 the Teeth as aliens, only giving them nourishment 
 while sound and fit for service, but not allowing them, 
 when diseased the common benefits of that society in 
 which they are placed. They cannot exfoliate, as no 
 operations go on in them except growth ; therefore, if 
 any part is dead, the living has not the power of throwing 
 it off*, and forming an external surface, capable of sup¬ 
 porting itself, like the other parts of the body : indeed, 
 if they had such a power, no good purpose could be 
 answered by it; for a piece of Tooth simply dead, is 
 almost as useful as if the whole was living: which may 
 be observed every day. 
 
 The pain, however, appears to take its rise from the 
 Tooth as a centre- That it should be more severe than 
 
 what 
 
OF THE DISEASES 
 
 146 
 
 what is generally produced by similar inflammations in 
 other parts of the body, may perhaps be accounted 
 for, when we consider that these parts do not readily 
 yield ; as is likewise the case in whitloes. 
 
 It sometimes happens, that the mind is not directed 
 to the real seat of the disease, the sensation of pain not 
 seeming to be in the diseased Tooth, but in some neigh¬ 
 bouring Tooth which is perfectly sound. This has 
 often misled operators, and the sympathizing Tooth has 
 fallen a sacrifice to their ignorance. 
 
 In all cases of diseased Teeth, the pain is brought 
 on by circumstances unconnected with the disease; as 
 for instance Cold, wherefore they are more trouble¬ 
 some commonly in winter than in summer. Extraneous 
 matter entering the cavity, and touching the nerve and 
 vessels, will also bring on the pain. 
 
 This pain is frequently observed to be periodical; 
 sometimes there being a perfect intermission, sometimes 
 only an abatement of it. The paroxysm comes on 
 once in twenty-four hours; and, for the most part, 
 towards the evening. The bark has therefore been 
 tried ; but that failing, the disorder has been suspected 
 .to be of the rheumatic kind, and treated accordingly 
 with no better success. At lengthy after a more par¬ 
 ticular 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 14? 
 
 ticular examination of the Teeth, one of them has been 
 suspected to be unsound; and, being extracted,* has 
 put an end to the disorder. This shews how injudicious 
 it is to give medicines in such cases, while the true state ‘ 
 of the Tooth is unknown. 
 
 This disease is often the cause of bad breath, more 
 so than any other disease of those parts; especially 
 when it has exposed the cavity of the Tooth. This 
 most probably arises from the rotten part of the Tooth, 
 and the juices of the mouth, and food, all stagnating 
 in this hollow part, which is warm, and hastens putre^ 
 faction in them. 
 
 i 
 
 I come now to the prevention and cure of this 
 disease. 
 
 The first thing to be considered, is, the cure of the 
 decaying state of the Tooth, or rather, the means of 
 preventing the farther progress of the decay; and 
 more especially before it hath reached the cavity, 
 whereby the Tooth may be in some degree preserved ; 
 the consequent pain and inflammations, commonly 
 called Tooth-ach, avoided* and often the consequent 
 abscesses called Gum Boils. I believe, however, that 
 iio such means of absolute prevention are as yet 
 
 U* . known. 
 
known. Tlie progress of the disease, in some cases*, 
 appears to have been retarded, by removing that part 
 which is already decayed ; but experience shews, that 
 there is but little dependence upon this practice. I have 
 known cases where, the black spot having been filed 
 off and scooped entirely out, the decay has stopped for 
 many years. This practice is supposed to prevent at 
 least any effect that the part already rotten may have 
 upon the sounder parts; however, if this is all the 
 good that arises from this practice, I believe, in most 
 cases, it might be as welL omitted. Even if it were an 
 effectual practice, it could not be an universal one; for 
 it is not always in the power of the operator to remove 
 this decayed part, either on account of its situation,, 
 or on account of its having made too great a progress, 
 before it is discovered. When it is on the basis of 
 a grinder, or on the posterior side of its neck, it can 
 scarcely be reached. It becomes also impracticable, 
 when the disease is still allowed to go on, and the 
 cavity becomes exposed, so that the patient is now 
 liable to all the consequences already described, and the 
 Tooth is making haste towards a total decay: in such a 
 case, if the decay be not too far advanced, that is, if it 
 be not rendered useless simply as a Tooth, I would 
 advise that it be extracted ; then immediately boiled, 
 with a view to make it perfectly clean, and also destroy 
 any life there may be in the Tooth ; and then that it 
 
 be 
 
OF THE TEETH. 14^ 
 
 fee restored to the socket: this will prevent any farther 
 decay of the Tooth, as it is now dead, and not to be 
 acted upon by any disease, but can only suffer chyrni- 
 cally or mechanically. 
 
 This practice, however, I would only recommend in 
 grinders, where we have no other resource on account 
 of the number of fangs, as will be more fully explained 
 hereafter. This practice has sometimes been followed 
 with success; and when it does succeed, it answers the 
 same end as the burning the nerve, but with much 
 greater certainty. 
 
 - V -TV ' 1 ...>>* \ ■ \ i ■ * » • V ' \ ) - , j * < ’. * T ' 
 
 If the patient will not fubmit to have the Tooth 
 drawn, the nerve may be burned: that this may have 
 the desired effect, it must be done to the very point of 
 the fang, which is not always possible. Either of the 
 concentrated acids, such as those e of vitriol, nitre, or sea- 
 salt, introduced as far into the fang of the Tooth as pos¬ 
 sible, is capable of destroying its soft parts, which most 
 probably are the seat of pain: a little caustic alkali will 
 produce the same effect. But it is a difficult operation 
 to introduce any of these substances into the root of the 
 fang, till the decay has gone a considerable length, 
 especially if it be a Tooth of the Upper Jaw; for it is 
 hardly possible to make fluids pass against their own 
 gravity : in these cases, the common caustic is the best 
 
 U 2 application, 
 
lj5 p OF THE DISEASES, 
 
 %r ▼ <* ^ _ i 
 
 application, as it is a solid. The caustic should be 
 
 introduced with a small dossil of lint; but even this will 
 
 * 
 
 scarcely convey it far enough. If it be the lower jaw, 
 the caustic need only be introduced into the hollow of 
 the Tooth 3 for, by its becoming fluid, by the moisture of 
 the part, it will then descend down the cavity of the 
 fang, as will also any of the acds; is but patients will 
 often not suffer this to be done till they have endured 
 much pain, and several inflammations. 
 
 When there is no other symptom except pain in the 
 Tooth, we have many modes of treatment recom¬ 
 mended, which can only be temporary in their effects. 
 These act by derivation, or stimulus applied to some 
 other part of the body. Thus, to burn the ear by 
 hot irons, has sometimes been a successful practice, and 
 has relieved the Tooth-ach. 
 
 i 
 
 Some stimulating medicine, as spirit of lavender 
 snuffed up into the nose, will often carry off the pain. 
 
 When an inflammation takes place in the surround¬ 
 ing parts, it often is assisted by an additional cause, as 
 cold, or fever: when the inflammation hath taken place 
 in a great degree, then it becomes more the object of 
 another consideration; for it may be lessened like any 
 other inflammation arising from similar causes; the 
 
 pressure 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 pressure of an extraneous body, or exposure of an; 
 internal cavity. 
 
 If the inflammation be very great, it will be proper 
 to take away some blood. The patient may likewise 
 properly be advised to hold some strong vinous spirit, 
 for a considerable time, in his mouth. Diluted acids, 
 as vinegar, &c. may likewiss be of use, applied in the 
 same manner. Likewise, preparations of lead would 
 be adviseable ; but these might prove dangerous, if they 
 should be accidentally swallowed. 
 
 If the skin is affected, poultices, containing some of 
 the above-mentioned substances, produce relief. The 
 pain, in many cases, being often more than the patient 
 can well bear, warm applications to the part have 
 been recommended, such as hot brandy, to divert the 
 mind ; also spices, essential oils, &c. which last are, 
 perhaps, the best. A little lint or cotton soaked in 
 laudanum, is often applied with success; ’ and laudanum 
 ought likewise to be taken internally, to procure an 
 interval of some ease. Blisters are of service in most 
 inflammations of these parts, whether they arise from a 
 diseased Tooth, or not. They cannot be applied to the 
 part, but they divert the pain, and draw this stimulus 
 to another part; they may be conveniently placed either 
 behind the ear, or in the nape of the neck. These 
 
 last- 
 
•« . ( ' J, v \ i :j ,( y i \ i 
 
 132 • OF THE DISEASES 
 
 , . •'■;!' • i ; .: '■ : ' 
 
 last-mentioned methods can only be considered as tem¬ 
 porary means of relief, and such as only affect the 
 inflammation. Therefore the Tooth is still exposed to 
 future attacks of the same disease. 
 
 • i ) < . ‘ ^ *■ ■ • k - ' ’ V 5 , , 1 . ! 
 
 S* . i , . . , , 
 
 . % f ( [ . k . > , • } 4 f. : . , .is 
 
 STOPPING OF THE TEETH. 
 
 IF the destruction of the life of the Tooth, either 
 by drawing and restoring it again, or by the actual or 
 potential cauteries, has not been effected, and only 
 the cure of the inflammation has been attempted, another 
 method of preventing inflammation is to be followed, 
 which is to allow as little stimulus to take place as 
 possible. The cavity of the Tooth not being capable 
 of taking the alarm like most other cavities in the 
 
 the body, and of course not suppurating, as has been 
 already observed, often no more is necessary, either to 
 prevent the inflammation from taking place altogether, 
 or extending farther, than to exclude all extraneous 
 irritating matter; therefore, the stopping up the cavity 
 becomes, in many cases, the means of preventing future 
 attacks of the inflammation, and often retards even 
 the progress of the disease, that is, the farther decay 
 of the Tooth; so that many people go on for years 
 
 thus 
 
 i 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 153 
 
 thus assisted: but it is a method which must be put 
 n practice early, otherwise it cannot be continued long ; 
 for, if the disease has done considerable damage to the 
 inside of the Tooth, so as to have weakened it much, 
 the whole body of the Tooth, most probably, will 
 soon give way in mastication: therefore, under such 
 circumstances, the patient must be cautioned, not to 
 make too free with the Tooth in eating. 
 
 Gold and lead are the metals generally made use of 
 for stopping Teeth. Gold being less pliable, must be 
 used in the leaf; lead is so soft in any form, as to take 
 on any shape by a very small force. 
 
 Stuffing the hollow Tooth with wax, galbanum, &c. 
 can but be of very little service, as it is in most cases 
 impossible to confine these substances, or preserve them 
 from being soon worn away; however, they have their 
 uses, as it is a practice which the patients themselves 
 can easily put in execution. 
 
 It often happens from neglect, and much oftener 
 in spite of all the means that can be used, that the 
 Tooth becomes so hollow as to give way, whereby the 
 passage becomes too large to keep in any of the above- 
 mentioned substances; however, in this case, it some¬ 
 times happens that a considerable part of the body of 
 
 the 
 
154 
 
 OF THE DISEASES 
 
 the Tooth will still stand, and then a small hole may be 
 drilled through this part; and after the cavity hath been 
 well stopped, a small peg may be put into the hole, so as 
 to keep in the lead/gold, &c. But when this cannot be 
 done, we may consider the broken Tooth as entirely 
 useless, or at least it will soon be so ; and it is now open 
 to attacks of inflammation, which the patient must 
 either bear, or submit to have the Tooth pulled out. 
 If the first be chosen, and the repeated inflammations 
 submitted to, a cure will be performed in time, by the 
 stump becoming totally dead ; but it is better to have 
 it pulled out, and suffer once for all. 
 
 Upon pulling out these Teeth, we may in general 
 observe a pulpy substance at the root of the fang, so 
 firmly adhering to the fang, as to be pulled out with it. 
 This is in some pretty large, so as to have made a 
 considerable cavity at the bottom of the socket. This 
 substance is the first beginning of the formation of a 
 Gum Boil, as it at times inflames and suppurates. 
 
 SECT, 
 
 / 
 
 J 
 
OF THF TEF Tit 
 
 i 
 
 SECT. II. 
 
 THE DECAY OF TIIE TEETH, BY DENUDATION. ’ 
 
 m ? ; . 
 
 X HERE is another decay of the Teeth much less 
 common than that already described, which has a 
 very singular appearance. It is a wasting of the sub¬ 
 stance of the Tooth very different from the former. 
 In all the instances I have seen, it has begun on the 
 exterior surface of the Tooth, pretty close to the arch 
 of the gum. The first appearance is a want of 
 enamel, whereby the bony part is left exposed ; but 
 neither the enamel nor the bony part alter in consistence 
 as in the above-described decay. As this decay spreads, 
 more and more of the bone becomes exposed, in which 
 respect also it differs from the former decay; and hence 
 it may be called a denuding process. The bony sub¬ 
 stance of the Teeth also gives way, and the whole 
 wasted surface has exactly the appearance as if the 
 Tooth had been filed with a rounded file, and after¬ 
 wards had been finely polished. At these places the 
 bony parts, being exposed, become brown. 
 
 I have seen instances, where it appeared as if the 
 .outer surface of thefoony part, * which is in contact with 
 
 X the 
 
t/tf OF THE DISEASES 
 
 irr ' f 'f 't 
 
 the- inner surface of .the. enamel, had first been lost; 
 so that , the attraction of cohesion between the two 
 had been destroyed ; and as if the enamel had been 
 separated for want of support, for it is terminated all 
 at once. • v 
 
 In one case, the two Incisors had lost the whole 
 of the enamel; on their anterior surfaces they were 
 
 hollowed from side to side, as if a round file had been 
 
 ‘ i 'tu li t "lO XIC 2n oJ ii 
 
 applied to them longitudinally, and had the finest polish 
 imaginable. The three Grinders on each side appeared 
 as if a round file had been used on them, in a con¬ 
 trary direction to that on the Incisors, viz. across their 
 bodies close to the gum, so that there was a groove 
 running across their bodies, which was smooth in the 
 highest degree. Some of the other Teeth in the same 
 jaw had begun to decay in a similar manner ; also, the 
 Teeth in the Lower Jaw were become diseased. 
 
 I saw a case very lately, where the four Incisors of 
 the Upper Jaw had lost their enamel entirely on their 
 anterior surfaces, and there was scarcely a Tooth in the 
 mouth which had not the appearance of having had a 
 file applied across it close to the gum. 
 
 Those whom I have' known, have not been able to 
 attribute this disease to any cause; none of them had 
 
 ever 
 

 meAsaia jht io 
 
 OF THE TEETH. 
 
 157 
 
 ever done any thing particular to the Teeth/ nor was 
 there in appearance any thing partictilar in the constitu¬ 
 tion, which could give rise to'such a disease. In the 
 first of these cases, the person was about forty 1 ; in the 
 last^ about twenty years of age. 
 
 v. i: c 
 
 W i —- 
 
 From its attaching certain Teeth father than others, 
 in the same head, and a particular part of the Tooth, 
 
 I suspect it to be an original disease of the Tooth 
 
 ft , r J ; . J ' • •• , \ T : . . jiQrrof •• r!-I 
 
 itself; and not to depend, on accident, way or lire, con - 
 
 stitution, or any particular management of the Teethe : 
 
 "■ f ’ ' n * r: ' r{> ,r<c ' efd lami. m Yi z& 
 
 . ;• > i\J 0>S .v\(V . 0 .1 t*> k . j • c v f.J - r ‘ r » y < - -■ 
 
 DVOO;<, S 2JSW 1101 i) 1? : • 02 0 ; ;, iC | 3 ^ i 
 
 ■J.d) ill xbooma ssw cUaw J gnixirm-t 
 
 on'.isa ifij ni illaiT tmJio -O h S a)8 .wwpb 
 
 on;! .0: ,uj. ; to »••• ■ 1 
 
 * y.v 1- - ' ; \ 
 
 rd J H 
 •D 0$ fWJjpri bfirf v//i[ 
 
 ' V- "i:: \... O 0 £?J vi 7 - 
 
 o aioeionl mot 
 ibib rtb yh'Jrt' 
 jrlt. ni rfJooT & 
 
 h bfid nmvM id son/n-Bc 
 
 t fn 
 
 11/ p- 
 
 >1 u n wt f 
 
 ‘1 '} ' V OV- \ 
 
 •roe b.K'-. :H. o4 f:'TT 
 
 f ',. '-' f; ’ o$=cdc-b n c>cy:y~ badneb olfi 
 
 X 2 
 
 OBiI f03fb io anon • 020:0 o3 ; . 
 
 1 SECT. 
 
 ^non 1. 
 
 : !i,i 
 
 CO j(;i >} 1 $ 
 
 u , J 
 
153 
 
 OF THE DISEASE'S 
 
 0^7 r-. va nw&hs'jd ml thirtw *, rbooT 
 
 vt ■<: ,WQV?&i nbxi ?■ vA me a srli teib 
 
 SECT* HI* 
 
 ; : o c >v r A ?rfa ni $33Ja33ib lo wj& r j uit.t n 
 
 jdhv)23b Oj boTJOlQ 
 
 t r • , 
 
 I rtoid 
 
 SWELLING OP THE FANCU 
 
 ( v uywfi 
 
 Another disease of the Teeth is a swelling of the 
 Fang, which most probably arises from inflammation, 
 while the body continues sound; and is of that kind 
 which in any other bone would' be called a Spina. 
 Ventosa*. It gives considerable pain, and nothing cans 
 be seen externally. 
 
 N 
 
 The pain may either be in the Tooth itself, or the 
 Alveolar Process, as it is obliged to give way to the 
 increase of the Fang. 
 
 As a swelling of this kind does not tend to the sup¬ 
 purative inflammation, and as I have not been able te 
 distinguish its symptoms from those of the nervous, 
 Tooth-ach, it becomes a matter of some difficulty to 
 the operator; for the only cure yet known is the 
 
 extraction. 
 
 * Vide Natural History of the Teeth,, page 37 * 
 
QE THE; TEETH, 
 
 extraction of the Tooth; which has been often neglected 
 on a supposition that the pain has been nervous. 
 
 These diseases of the^Teetby'arising from inflamma¬ 
 tion, become often the cause of diseases in the Alveolar 
 
 Processes* and Gums; which I shall proceed to describe. 
 
 0 t*/% an 7 7o vi .i„n * 9 
 
 lo §mibw4 s d rftooT orb .to oz&szih JTSHTO 
 
 , moii eo na ^idjydoiq " iora xbidw tgnt'i 
 
 bid A J&db. lo ei ha* ;Lauoe gOnmlaoo vbod onJ 
 
 . ;u<jB i.' boilso ‘ sd • bj.uu •> ?nad vnij ai .dbnb*’- 
 
 %r,i&x.i b/is c ti • . u - . ■■ ■ g J *"&?.o laoV 
 
 . nbaiotao uoo2 sd 
 
 J-. j i >ik^OQ ‘ > i} lli 
 
 >ri- u: /; J« ijmd&j,:'}. 
 
 .. . fiiiii iibq i-i. V 
 ££ r ?.?. 030 r i ifcioovl /• 
 
 i-,: 3tfb lo 
 
 qtf 2 3 *b at boot Son goob ho i aidi "lo gnHIowa £ a A 
 oi ii od :o > . sgoiink f hu: '• mminim .ijj-.?’ 
 
 ,-auo '^t>4irtiliOPti eihQiqmv •• at* fku> 
 
 ->3 mtb omori >o iji iu i; so:../.; od . ,1',: ;ao r 
 
 - - j = '• i.. uwoiiit )o: > . , ,v> ■ >. 
 
 j •• <i j »>'. ’ SEC I • 
 
 % «r 
 
 i) •*■ 
 
 
 • •• • 
 
 , * ■* 
 
 a v o\ 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
m f 
 
 a 
 
 OF THE DISEASES 
 
 .<-*• ,* 
 
 4 G ^DJ 
 
 mJ 
 
 /•Vrr-4 nori 
 
 ifa 
 
 VO 
 
 ^won 
 
 . -,.,A .. 
 
 - - T*> •*" 
 
 -■> j. irtJ 
 
 • -•'•■ ■->■■' ->0 - “* 
 
 - '*•■• ~ j. ■*. v ■> ' 
 
 SECT. IV. 
 
 'GUM-BILES. 
 
 XX 
 
 rv 
 
 1. « ■ 
 
 :j ex!-'; 
 
 ■ r\ 
 J A 
 
 nh 1m 
 
 ;oVxJIei^5§ 3« 
 
 \7- if ■ ■ ■ . j, • ! ; p 
 
 v • . ‘ J - 
 
 ■> 
 
 * 7 
 
 . ; » * 
 
 
 : Ci V ‘ t: J ' '■ 
 
 V U:' 
 
 . 1 . j t I i 1 (. a 0 i1 ? 
 
 o 
 
 
 -4 
 
 
 T . t 
 
 suppuration cannot easily take place 
 within the cavity of a Tooth, yet it often happens, that 
 the inflammation, which is extended beyond it, is so 
 great as to produce supptiration in the jtivv, at the bottom 
 
 * ll * ) 1 H / | p 
 
 of the socket, where the diseased Tooth is, forming 
 there a small abscess, commonly called a Gum-bile. 
 
 tA /nq<^T Arl‘t rftA'it ‘ t^fnw 333f|T' 
 
 This inflammation is often very considerable, especially 
 when the first suppuration takes place. It is often more 
 diffused than inflammations in other parts, and affects 
 the whole face, &c. 
 
 
 The matter, as in all other abscesses, makes its own 
 
 j jj noijom oil) bovom od jguqoT l&Hf 
 
 way outwards; and, as it cannot be evacuated through 
 
 the Tooth, it destroys the Alveolar Processes, and 
 tumifies the Gum, generally on the fore part, either 
 pointing directly at the root of the Tooth, or separating 
 the gum from it; and is evacuated in one or other of 
 
 thess 
 
or THE TEiTH. 161 
 
 % ? 1A 3 %] n >» p %0 { ,p , 
 
 these two ways, seldom on the inside of the Gum: how¬ 
 ever, this sometimes happens. 
 
 Gum-biles seldom arise from other causes ^ however, 
 it sometimes happens that they originate from a disease 
 in the socket or jaw, having no connexion with the 
 Tooth, and only affecting it secondarily* Upon draw¬ 
 ing such Teeth, they are generally found diseased 
 at or near the point, being there very rough and irre¬ 
 gular, similar .to^ulcerating bones. -There is no 
 disease to appearance in the bpdy of the Tooth. These 
 last described Gum-biles. may arise wholly from such a 
 cause, the appearance on the fang of the Tooth being 
 
 only an effect. ooT ba?E ^-. s | .iwhoa''ad*.* 
 
 id 
 
 
 These abscesses, whether arising from the Teeth or 
 the sockets, always destroy the Alveolar Processes on 
 that side where they open; as is very evident in the 
 jaw-bones of many sculls: on which account, the 
 Tooth becomes more or less loose. It may be perceived 
 in the living body; for when the Alveolar Process 
 is entirely destroyed on the outside of the Tooth, if 
 
 V I ■ *. ■ I . 1 * W •• 
 
 that Tooth be moved* the motion will be observed 
 
 rtnuonlJ noJ£uoi»v^ uo Ydnoj&o 3i f ons : fcoriiWjuo yi»w 
 
 under the Gum, along the whole length of the Fang. 
 
 * ■ • ■; 4 
 
 i . 
 
 
 ' > 
 
 > n *».; - < '-*i* y 
 
 * f * A. i r ^..1 i. 1 ' 
 
 
 .[■mn- 
 
 So far the Teeth, AJveolar Processes, .and Gums, 
 
 nnnBifiq * * /o 7 . • T - ’ >._» ■ • \ • 7 f. 
 
 become diseased by consent, 
 
 I i r > P 5 * ) * . . ) * , , 4 ’ ; > 1 ‘ ; \ ’? ■ * . 
 
 > fioi 1 
 
 rni?o fur? 
 
 it 
 
or XH.EO If'EASES 
 
 ft is common ’for these abscesses to skin over, and, 
 in all appearance, heal. This is peculiar tc> those 
 which open through the Gums; but those which 
 discharge themselves between the Gums and Teeth, 
 can never heal up, because the Gum cannot unite 
 with the Tooth; however, the discharge in them 
 becomes less at times, from a subsiding of the sup¬ 
 puration ; wl}ich indeed is what allows ,the other 
 to skin over. But either exposure to cold, or some 
 other accidental cause, occasioning a fresh inflammation, 
 produces an increased suppuration, which either opens 
 the old orifice in the Gum, or augments the discharge 
 by the side of the Tooth; however, I believe, the 
 inflammation in this last case is not so violent as in 
 the other, where a fresh ulceration is necessary for the 
 passage of the matter. 
 
 Thus a Gum-bile goes on for years, healing and 
 opening alternately; the effect of which is, that the 
 Alveolar Processes are at length absorbed, and the Tooth 
 gets looser and looser, till it either drops out, or is 
 extracted. r 
 
 ; • ,‘j r * o f)fH O ? £ hnp T 7j m ?ri 1 nr O Rfi * V/ft? • ftn 
 
 • f i t D k i fif <r\ »v \ Y » y\ r > • i \ V\V\\ (V ^ fi t 
 
 Most probably, in all such cases, the communication 
 between the cavity of the Tooth and the Jaw, is cut 
 off; yet it keeps in part its lateral attachments, especially 
 when the Gum grasps the Tooth ; but in those cases, 
 
 where 
 
 t 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 163 
 
 where the matter passes between the Gum and the 
 Tooth, these attachments are less; but some of them 
 are still retained, particularly on the side opposite to the 
 passage for the matter. 
 
 A / ■ r s ♦ ' . . f 1 ■ ■ • / ’*■ f ‘ i f * "V - 1 ' f~{ V* 
 
 Gum-biles are easily known. Those which open 
 through the Gum may be distinguished by a small rising 
 between the arch of the Gum, and the attachment of 
 the lip: upon pressing the Gum at the side of this point, 
 
 . some matter will commonly be observed oozing out at 
 the eminence. This eminence seldom subsides entirely ; 
 for even when there is no discharge, and the opening is 
 healed over, a small rising may still be perceived, which 
 shews that the Gum-bile has been there. 
 
 Those Gum-biles which discharge themselves between 
 the Gum and the Tooth, are always discovered by pressing 
 the Gum, whereby the matter is pressed out, and is seen 
 lying in the angle between the Gum and Tooth. 
 
 These abscesses happen much more frequently in the 
 upper law than in the lower, and also more frequently 
 to the Cuspidati , Incisores , and Bicuspides in that jaw, than 
 to the Molares \ seldom to the fore Teeth in the lower 
 
 ja$y. t , 
 
 As 
 
154 
 
 OF THE DI'S E A & $ S 
 
 As Gum-biles are in general the consequence of rotten 
 Teeth, we find them in young and middle-aged people 
 more frequently than in old ; but they appear to be most: 
 common to the Shedding-teeth. This will arise from 
 those Teeth being more liable to become rotten ; and, 
 perhaps there may be another reason, viz. the process, 
 of ulceration which goes on in these Teeth*, in some 
 cases falling into suppuration. 
 
 It sometimes happens in these Gum-biles, that a 
 fungus will push out at the orifice, from a luxuriant 
 disposition to form granulations in the inside of the 
 abscess, and the want of power to heal or skin; the same 
 thing frequently happens in issues, where the parts have 
 a disposition to granulate, but have not the power of 
 healing., on account of an extraneous body being kept 
 there. The Tooth in the present case acts as an extra¬ 
 neous body ; and by the secretion of matter, the abscess is 
 prevented from healing. 
 
 In the treatment of Gum-biles, the practice will be 
 the same, whether the abscess has arisen from a diseased 
 Tooth, or a disease in the socket. 
 
 The 
 
 * * Vide Natural History of the Teeth, for an Explanation of this Process in 
 those Teeth, p. 98, 99. 
 
CUF f Hi' T EET H. 
 
 165 
 
 The Teeth being under such circumstances in the 
 animal machine, that they cannot partake of all the 
 benefits of a cure in the same manner as other parts do; 
 on that account, when an abscess forms itself about the 
 root of a Tooth, the Tooth, by losing its connexion 
 with the other parts, loses every power of union, as it 
 is not endowed with the power of granulating, and 
 thereby it becomes an extraneous body, or at least acts 
 here as an extraneous body, and one of the worst kind, 
 such as it is not in the power of any operation of the 
 machine to get rid of. T his is not the case with any other 
 part of the body; for when any other part becomes dead, 
 the machine hi - the power of separating it from the living, 
 called sloughing or exfoliation, and expelling it, whence 
 a cure is effected ; but in the case of Gum-biles, the 
 only cure of them is the extraction of the Tooth. As 
 this is the last resource, every thing is to be done to 
 make the parts as easy under the disease as possible, so 
 that this operation may be postponed. 
 
 When the abscess has opened through the Gum, I 
 believe the best method that can be tried, with a view to 
 prevent future gatherings, is to prevent the closing up 
 of the abscess; and this may be done, by enlarging the 
 opening, and keeping it enlarged, till the whole internal 
 surface of the cavity of the abscess is skinned over, or till 
 the opening in the Gum loses the disposition to close up, 
 
 Y 2 which 
 
OF THE DISEASES 
 
 16(i 
 
 which will in a great measure prevent any future 
 formation of matter; or at least, whatever is formed will 
 find an easy outlet, which will prevent these accumula^ 
 tions from taking place ever after. The end of the fang 
 will indeed be hereby exposed ; but, under such cir¬ 
 cumstances, it will not be in a worse situation than when 
 soaked in matter. 
 
 One method of doing this is to open the Gum-biles 
 by a crucial incision, the full width of the abscess, and 
 fill it well with lint, which should be dipped in lime- 
 water, or a diluted solution of lunar caustic, made by 
 dissolving one drachm of the caustic in two ounces of 
 distilled water; and the wound should be dressed very 
 frequently, as it is with difficulty that the dressing can 
 be kept in. If this is not sufficient to keep the wound 
 open, it may be touched with the lunar caustic, so as 
 to produce a slough ; and this may be repeated, if it 
 should be found necessary. 
 
 One considerable disadvantage occurs in this practice, 
 which is the difficulty of keeping on the dressings; but 
 constant attention will make up for the inconvenience 
 of situation. 
 
 If the surface of the abscess be touched with the 
 lapis septicus, and the lip kept from coming in con¬ 
 tact 
 
O? THE TlffW I 0 f 
 
 met with the part for one minute, it answers better 
 tlian any other method ; for this, within that space of 
 time, will penetrate to the bottom. 
 
 $rjt to om \u. j 7 is i c >73 moil snort 
 
 The surface of the bile should be first wiped dry, as 
 much as the nature of the part will allow, to prevent 
 as much as possible the spreading of the caustic; which 
 by care can be prevented, as the operator will watch it 
 the whole time. 
 
 ^ .j . .1^ J «h» U- . ■ | • I 1 r if / CV /“{ *^r r- A v /*» o | i f v r ► -j. 9 
 
 To extract the Tooth, then to file off any diseased 
 part of it, and immediately to replace it, has been 
 practised, but often without the desired success ; for it 
 has often happened, that a Tooth has been introduced 
 into a diseased jaw. This practice, however, now and 
 then, has succeeded. 
 
 When a Gum-bile is formed on a back Tooth, or 
 Molcires , such very nice treatment is not necessary, as 
 when it happens to the fore Teeth; because, appearances 
 are there of less consequence : therefore, the gum may 
 be slit down upon the fang through its whole length, 
 from the opening of the Gum-bile to its edge, which 
 will prevent any future union ; and the whole cavity of 
 the abscess, skinning over, will prevent any future 
 collection of matter. The wound appears afterwards 
 like the hare-lip, and therefore this practice is not 
 
 adviseable 
 
T 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 ISS OF .THE DISEASES 
 
 V ' • ' 
 
 adviseable where it would be much in view, as when 
 the disease is in the fore Teeth. In these cases, where 
 the granulations push out through the small opening, 
 they may be cured by the method above mentioned ; 
 but, if it is not complied with, they may be very safely 
 
 cut off with a knife or launcet. However, this does 
 
 < ' • • * 
 
 not effect a cure ; for they commonly rise again. To 
 slit the gum, in this case, has been common; but it is 
 a bad method, whenever the defect is in sight. 
 
 .(ItOoT b‘j 6 ,£j. 32 ib 3 fli dilW. 
 
 lerd jboifqqfi taod od .a&o ^lihiuo tjv 
 
 srij had t znorLUji. .uv.u oj ytfcv. iir^ 
 
 3 ^d ibxb \o 3nolx >; 
 
 fjgfJV/ 
 
 8 idt 
 
 iOjJsrn 
 
 • : ,• 
 
 ^-vlwaa sixfr. 3 ud 
 
 
 xoflii owl 10 yii£) £ xn osx t xioilo llm yod l? / 
 
 u juu ^ 10 V 3 8 i 5 Agul 8 £ 
 
 t aooz aoib ylisrinog 
 
 .•ii- Jiocfqs r.jic 4 io r y.n.;;xi o? no K {pu I 
 * rnori? xljx v/ ^mibbarcx moil 2x100^2102 ^ ioJab .oJ 
 
 oa ifis^qs ban ? rujx) . i.ioil oono «s pehsjpdj wdw 
 
 on avsd yadJ avaibd' I t nscj \lap a * 3cjf 
 
 .nodboqzib JnsngiLern 
 
 SEC«. 
 
 ,8326c bco~d x m dim ma>b nooz avsd I <-pvawoi t 
 
 i ad Jon bJuoj ala 
 
o f a t f i fed E S d 
 
 ttorfw js,s ,'v-rviv Hi (hum od bluov/ ri edst^i - ^ 
 
 :'>1i ; il'vvf ,<.'.-,'* : '.l 3f.'J i.t i I • tjb3-I 3*J0i 3fU Hi 81: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fl i i ^ 
 
 gm 
 
 t'OOO 
 
 X 
 
 11 
 
 srricj 
 
 n i *. * t 
 
 b r.iii 
 
 ..., -v . > ^r 1 i V; • nOV'"? I -)fj VI 
 
 OVOCUi jOfu.ii'.i -yt.j • ^ 
 
 li XC LIE SC ENC ES FROM THF GUM. 
 
 |rr , ■ :-\W Tl€ 
 
 Fi 
 
 7 O * y 
 
 AVy.J* y- V* 
 
 on 
 
 © 
 
 i >■- y» - - 1 -■•• A 
 
 uf i viaommcD yz-:i 
 
 tR OM bad Teeth there are also sometimes excres¬ 
 cences, arising at once out of the Gum, near or in 
 contact with the diseased Tooth. 
 
 In general they are easily extracted with a knife, or 
 whatever cutting instrument can be best applied; but 
 this will vary according to their situations, and the 
 extent of their base. 
 
 % 
 
 They will often rise in a day or two after the operation 
 as high as ever ; but this newly-generated matter 
 generally dies soon, and the disease terminates well. 
 They have often so much of a cancerous appearance, as 
 to deter surgeons from meddling with them; but 
 where they arise at once from the Gum, and appear to 
 be the only diseased part, I believe they have no 
 malignant disposition. 
 
 However, I have seen them with very broad bases, 
 and where the whole could not be removed, and yet 
 
 no 
 
 «• 
 
170 
 
 OF THE, DISEASES 
 
 no bad consequences have attended their removal. 
 These often rise again in a few years, by which means 
 they become very troublesome. 
 
 
 After the extirpation of them, it is often necessary 
 to apply the actual cautery to stop the bleeding ; for 
 arteries going to increased parts are themselves increased, 
 and also become diseased, and have not the contractile 
 power of a souud artery. 
 
 ■{Tov io nofio -oijg voiiT .^{id-rrwO boffcT v f 
 
 1 1 r 
 
 etc 
 
 iCjJuUU 
 
 9 “o 2 Ofir? m 
 
 Irrv 
 
 iV 1 ) ’ 
 
 dbrlT I'wtilo "*di 
 % 
 
 oib to rnomrb.ftttE 
 ji ^Jnioq liorit IB 
 (tommoo 
 brill fbiig 3rl 
 
 jiyy 
 
 fxs.j 
 
 Ft % l 
 
 (II 
 
 soononpoanoo 
 
 aircra? 
 
 ib ylnommo: 
 
 
 yUfihj©fi 2 ^* Tjii 
 
 Off] DfC 
 
 o*mr lidjrtsi 
 
 gnhznq 
 
 od wq orb ni iftqob 
 
 
 djs an ii t inng orlt or qil 
 j Vt vhhr,oi OTorn 
 
 orb do slnonu/gornt 
 srft‘ 83 thgfbife rfoidw t qd 
 .lr/3 orli oiil/sMool 
 
 > 7 n jam irloqqrr orb rtf 
 
 . -Moa 5:- v moil xbtii n.c ilia! trjod/r 
 
 &ECT, 
 
 fa v>n ifrffrtJ-O •• bfl* -riJMV ';■> 
 
 v i #• r \ 
 
 *>r 
 
 > 4 
 
 3 atnti tioogiir? ^;b bit 
 
 '(tqrja 
 
 yt'-‘ 7 f ■ no(n r ;io ■** 
 
 mfd 
 
 

 or THE TFEtrt. 171 
 
 n r j»i : if, 'i / a; 1 - ? yjawp^n y> b^d on 
 
 ,3*£3V WSi £ ii ( 
 
 tJliiOcjii 
 
 SECT. .VI. 
 
 r;o 'it ii avo : 
 
 • . i ' i. 
 
 r 07l Y ?V 
 
 ■v 
 
 iU - A - 
 
 r io Scar! F 
 
 >30 
 
 
 DEEPLY'SEAXEU ABSCESSES ,1ST THE JAWS. 
 
 i'J 3JB J>!) JjUq ?/ ! * «* El3i«U J ~JXJi -,' r j ii> 
 
 Sometimes deeper Abscesses occur than those 
 
 commonly called Gum-biles. They are often of very 
 serious consequences, producing carious bones, &c. 
 These commonly arise from a disease in the Tooth, 
 and more especially in the Cuspiclati , those Teeth 
 passing farther into the jaw than the others. Their 
 depth in the jaw being beyond the attachment of the 
 lip to the gum, if an abscess forms at their points, it 
 more readily makes its way through the common 
 integuments of the face, than between the gum and 
 lip, which disfigures the face; and when in the lower 
 jaw, looks like the evil. 
 
 •» . f 
 
 In the upper jaw, it makes a disagreeable Scar on the 
 face, about half an inch from the nose. 
 
 These, although they may sometimes arise from 
 diseases oi the Teeth and Gums, yet are properly the 
 object of common surgery; and the Surgeon must 
 
 2 . apply 
 
 > - 
 
.3 72 - 
 
 OF THE DISEASES 
 
 apply to the Dentist, if his assistance is necessary, to 
 pull out the Tooth, or to perform any other operation 
 which comes under his province. 
 
 It sometimes happens that the abscess is situated some 
 way from the root of the diseased Tooth, both in the 
 upper jaw and the lower ; but, I think, more frequently 
 in the lower. When it threatens to open externally on 
 the skin of the face, great care should be taken to pre¬ 
 vent it, and an opening very early made into the swelling 
 on the inside of the lip ; for it is generally very readily 
 felt there. This practice of early opening these abscesses 
 upon the inside of the mouth is more necessary, when 
 the abcess is in the lower jaw, than when in the upper ; 
 because matter, by its weight, always produces ulceration 
 more readily at the lower part. I have seen this prac¬ 
 tice answer, even when the matter had come so near the 
 skin, as to have inflamed it. If it is in the upper, the 
 opening need not be so very large; as the matter will 
 have a depending outlet. 
 
 To prevent a relapse of the disease, it will in most 
 cases be necessary to pull out the Tooth ; which has; 
 either been the first cause, or has become diseased in 
 consequence of the formation of the abscess; and in. 
 either case is capable of reproducing the disease®. 
 
 The 
 
OF THE' TEETH, 
 
 < o 
 
 The mouth should be often washed; and while the 
 water is within the mouth, the skin should be pressed 
 opposite to the abscess. 
 
 j 
 
 If the life of the bone be destroyed, it will exfoliate ; 
 and very probably two or three of the Teeth may come 
 away with the exfoliation. Little should be done in 
 such cases, except that the patient should keep the 
 mouth as clean as possible, by frequently washing it; and 
 when the bones exfoliate, they should be removed as soon 
 as possible. In these cases, it is but too common for 
 the Dentist to be very busy, and perhaps do mischief 
 through ignorance, 
 
 (i lonqn oiit nr nod'w nrrih ■, 
 
 ' noilEiaohi gaanboaq ifc 
 ;~Dfnq girl? naaa avEfl ! .1 
 
 oHj laan 02 orrioo b£f! 
 orb c i 9 qqif ni e-: if tl 
 Ittw 
 
 n w 
 
 ■ft i < 5 . 
 
 : JuIoU! 
 
 /JJM 
 
 < J 
 
 8£ii rloidw : rfaooT adi Tjo iinq oJ 
 
 m h >•; i- . : •? 1 •■hi 
 
 -.Hi bn& t Oft 
 
 1 
 
 ws > 
 
 > t -% q | r -, 
 : -Jvv? j HJ 
 
 Z 2 
 
 >£i jr 'Eina.uboi q.t 
 
 i | 
 
 A A 
 
 lo ootsxii ail. 
 
 » noq. 4 . 
 
 >fii ni ?a S 23 C 
 
 >d& adt 
 
 yd .laiiem a 
 
 Hjji 5 aad 
 
 ifli tp- v! rh&r 
 
 * ax on j 
 
 j nava /lawa. 
 
 rra aoil 
 
 h hv bH. o :t 8.0 
 
 P j 4 r 
 
 •- I i v. /T S 
 
 ; c • • bann p 
 
 ni f>aoo 
 
 ■ 
 
 > PorLnaaaD 
 
 O i, 
 
 •o avjBp 
 
 t £ inavaKj 
 
 ' 
 
 an 
 
 [ * 
 
 
 j j!) )r ! 
 
 
 SECT* 
 
 : ... • ; - 1 
 
 ‘far] /:.■ 
 
 nn ’ 
 
374 
 
 OF THE DISEASES 
 
 +* U I s7oi » • - 
 
 SECT. VII. 
 
 ><xb oJ Inc lorn i.r s 
 
 > ocfiii'j -ax ni od 
 
 ABSCESS OF THE ANTRUM MAXiLLARE. 
 
 37 
 
 \XI 
 
 
 HE Antrum Maxillare is very subject to inflam¬ 
 mation and suppuration, by means of diseases of the 
 neighbouring parts, and particularly of the duct lead¬ 
 ing to the nose being obliterated. Whether this is 
 the cause, or only an effect, is not easily determined ; 
 but there is great reason to suppose it an attendant, 
 from some of the symptoms. If it be a cause, we 
 may suppose, that the natural mucus of these cavities, 
 accumulating, irritates and produces inflammation for 
 its own exit ; in the same manner as an obstruction to 
 the passage of the Tears through the ductus ad Nasum , 
 produces an abscess of the lachrymal sac . 
 
 This inflammation of the Antrum gives a pain 
 which will be at the first taken for the Tooth-ach, 
 especially if there be a bad Tooth in that side ; however, 
 in these cases, the nose is more affected than commonly 
 in a Tooth-ach, 
 
 The 
 
OF THE tE'ETW 
 
 The eye is also affected ; and it is very common for 
 people with such a disease to have a severe pain in the 
 forehead, where the frontal sinuses are placed ; but still 
 the symptoms are not sufficient to distinguish the disease. 
 
 Time must disclose the true cause of the pain ; for it 
 will commonly continue longer than that which arises 
 
 from a diseased Tooth, and will become more and more 
 severe ; after which, a redness will be observed on the 
 
 fore part of the cheek, somewhat higher than the roots 
 of the Teeth, and a hardness in the same place, which 
 will be considerably circumscribed. This hardness may 
 be felt rather highly situated on the inside of the lip. 
 
 As this disease has been often treated of by surgeons, 
 I shall only make the following remarks concerning it: 
 
 •> jp. •* 1 t * 
 
 The first part of the cure, as well as of that of all 
 other abscesses, is to make an opening, but not in the 
 part where it threatens to point ; for that would gene- 
 rally be through the skin of the cheek. 
 
 If the disease is known early, before it has caused the 
 destruction of the fore part of the bone, there are two 
 ways of opening the abscess ; one, by perforating the par¬ 
 tition between the antrum and the nose, which may be 
 done ; and the other, by drawing the first or second 
 
 grinder 
 
I 
 
 175 
 
 OF THE DISEASES, &c. 
 
 grinder of that side, and perforating the partition between 
 the root of the alveolar process and the antrum; so that 
 the matter may be discharged for the future that way. 
 
 But if the fore part of the bone has been destroyed, 
 an opening may be made on the inside of the lip, where 
 the abscess most probably will be felt ; but this will be 
 more apt than the other perforation to heal, and thereby 
 may occasion a new accumulation ; which is to be 
 avoided, if possible, by putting in practice all the com¬ 
 mon methods of preventing openings from healing or 
 closing up : but this practice will rather prove trouble¬ 
 some; therefore the drawing the Tooth is to be preferred, 
 because it is not so liable to this objection. 
 
 absanoo o 
 
 , 2 ffili 
 
 30*11 02I7B 2£ flom 
 
 •J m o'i ) 5 . ' ‘'J. £’j J 
 
 
 x>jdq sdsi rloidv/ 
 
 W7 ‘fjd 05 laooqjs 
 
 
 ,> vI j.oaiioq mn ‘ diaoT odt 
 
 > t jC‘ n>n f £ T Fi f s - * 0 "" 
 
 * *, A 3 1 A •' r* X r. A J - 
 
 
 id TJU2 loo COE i 10 7 bn£ 
 
 
 
 ■ :ivooiq fOmsa odiyilct 
 
 
 
 oil np gnxbiioqob ono 10 
 
 
 'viiiLff 21 )jh h * x- 
 
 toiriw looito- IgTrl oriT 
 
 
 f, UJ ylDXHW 
 
 # 2022000*1 C I 'IBIoOvIA Off 
 
 
 o.-iH ' 
 
 ..; i£ . boo loeoc yj ifit/bBTQ 
 
 
 
 * * v d 
 
 " i f'N *> r ^ f L"L Mfc: ' 
 
 i.-y. c t «/f j 
 
 " '• M • t,'T£T*C t n T'l 't h it > CM I V 
 
 - :•* JrstJ.l jyxlUdb W 
 
 J ■ J \ 
 
 J ' ... J . V 
 
 CHAP* 
 

 ' •: I Ct 3 H'T> 1 c 
 
 II£ ,31), 
 
 :a ml 03 VAX 
 
 
 /fj Jq 
 
 ■i J. / J V) 
 
 1 L 
 I I 
 
 yO~ 
 
 CJ' 
 
 C II A P. II. 
 
 o -j o ysrii 
 
 £q>;’j ii- T Ud 
 
 [300 n.-. 
 
 0/* the Diseases of the Alveolar Processes , the Con- 
 
 3n Yeqiieiices of thmtP° _ lh ■ * 
 
 I r 
 
 tx/ 
 
 OijOJ 
 
 . ■ 
 
 ry^r 
 
 ;3ii 
 
 esmxiocx 
 
 * sboil.VtfH 
 
 H A V I N G thus far treated of the diseases of 
 the Teeth themselves, and those of the Sockets and 
 Gums, which either arise from them, or are similar to 
 such as arise from them, I come now to consider the 
 diseases which take place primarily in the Sockets, when 
 the Teeth are perfectly sound : these appear to be two ; 
 and yet I am not sure but that they are both fundamen¬ 
 tally the same, proceeding together fromthe same cause, 
 or one depending on the other. 
 
 The first effect which takes place,, is a wasting of 
 the Alveolar Processes, which are in many people 
 gradually absorbed, and taken into the system. This- 
 wasting begins first at the edge of -the socket, and 
 gradually goes on to> the root or bottom* 
 
 The 
 
ITS 
 
 OF THE DISEASES 
 
 The Gum, which is supported by the Alveolar 
 Process, loses its connexion, and recedes from the body 
 of the Tooth in proportion as the socket is lost; in 
 consequence of which, first the neck, and then more 
 or less of the fang itself, becomes exposed. The 
 Tooth of course becomes extremely loose, and at last 
 drops out. 
 
 The other effect is a filling up of the socket at the 
 bottom, whereby the Tooth is gradually pushed out. 
 As this disease seldom happens without being attended 
 by the other, it is most probable that they generally 
 both arise from the same cause. The second in these 
 cases may be an effect of the first. Both combine to 
 hasten the loss of the Tooth; but it sometimes happens 
 that they act separately \ for I have seen cases where the 
 Gum was leaving the Teeth, and yet the Tooth was not 
 in the least protruded ; on the other hand, I have seen 
 cases where the Tooth was protruding, and yet the 
 Gum kept its breadth ; but where this is not the case, 
 and the Gums give way, the Gums generally become 
 extremely diseased ; and as they are separated from both 
 the Teeth and the Alveolar Process, there is a very consi¬ 
 derable discharge of matter from those detached surfaces. 
 
 Though the wasting of the Alveoli at their mouths, 
 and the filling up at their bottoms, are to be considered 
 
 as 
 
OF THE ALVEOLA k £&6c£$SES. 
 
 m 
 
 &s diseases, when they happen early in life ; yet it would 
 appear to be only on account of a natural effect taking 
 place too soon; for the same thing is very common in 
 old age*: and also, as this process of filling up the 
 bottom, and wasting of the mouths of the Alveolar 
 Processes, takes place in all ages, where a Tooth has been 
 drawn, and the connexion between the two parts is 
 destroyed, this might lead us to suspect, that the 
 •original cause of these diseases may be a want of that 
 perfect harmony which is required between the Tooth 
 and Socket, whereby a stimulus may be given in some 
 degree similar to the loss of a Tooth ; and, by destroy¬ 
 ing that stimulus upon which the absorption of the 
 process and the filling up of the socket depend, the 
 natural disposition may be restored. This last opinion 
 is strengthened by the following case: 
 
 One of the first Incisores of the Upper Jaw of a 
 young lady was gradually falling lower and lower. She 
 was desirous of having a Tooth transplanted, which 
 might better fit the shallow socket* as it was now be¬ 
 come : she consulted me : I objected to this* fearing that 
 the same disposition might still continue ; in which 
 case the new Tooth would be probably pushed out in 
 about half a year ; that the time since the old one began 
 to sink, and a relief of so short a continuance, would 
 
 1 A a • • be 
 
 * Vide Natural History of the Teeth, page 7. 
 
OF THE DISEASES 
 
 ISO 
 
 be all the advantage gained by the operation ; but I 
 observed at the same time, that the operation might have 
 the effect of destroying the disposition to filling up, so 
 that the new Tooth might keep its ground. This idea 
 turned the balance in favour of the operation ; and it was 
 performed. Time shewed that the reasoning was just: 
 the^ Tooth fastened, and has kept in its situation for 
 some years. 
 
 These diseases arise often from visible causes. Any 
 thing that occasions a considerable and long-continued 
 inflammation in those parts, such particularly as a 
 salivation, will produce the same effhet. The scurvy 
 also, when carried to a great height, attacks the Gums 
 and the Alveolar Processes, which becomes a cause of 
 the dissolution of those parts. This is most remarkable 
 in the scurvy at sea. 
 
 i 
 
 When the disease arises from these two last causes, 
 the Gums are either affected with the same disease, 
 together with the Alveolar Processes, or they sympathize 
 with them. They swell, become soft and tender ; and, 
 upon the least pressure or friction, bleed very freely. 
 
 How far these diseases can be prevented and cured, 
 is, I believe, not known. 
 
 The 
 
OF THE ALVEOLAR PROCESSES. LSI 
 
 c A u A v i <5 t vi a n 1 a O i l \ 
 
 The practice hath been principally to scarify the Gums 
 freely ; and this with a view to fasten the Teeth made 
 loose by the disease, which has therefore generally made 
 a considerable progress before even an attempt towards a 
 cure has been made. This scarification has certainly a 
 good effect in some cases, the Teeth thereby becoming 
 much faster ; but how far the Alveolar Processes hav& 
 been destroyed in such instances, cannot be determined. 
 Perhaps, only a general fullness of the attaching mem¬ 
 brane, between the Tooth and the Process, had taken 
 place, as in a slight salivation, so as to push the Tooth 
 a little way out of the bony socket; which having 
 subsided by the plentiful bleeding, the Tooth of coupe 
 beconies, fast. Or perhaps, by producing an inflam¬ 
 mation of another kind, the first inflammation or 
 disposition to inflame is destroyed; which evidently 
 appeared in the case of the young lady above mentioned. 
 
 If the above practice is unsuccessful, and the Tooth 
 continues to protrude, it will either become very trou¬ 
 blesome, or a great deformity. A fore Tooth may not, 
 indeed, be at first so troublesome as a Grinder ; because 
 these Teeth frequently over lop ; but it will be extremely 
 disagreeable to the eye. 
 
 If the cause cannot be removed, the effect must be 
 the object of our attention. To file down the pro- 
 
 A a 2 jecting 
 
' ■' '■ 6P t (ft £>i s £ A s Ef¬ 
 
 fecting part is the only thing that can be done; but care- 
 must be taken not to file into the cavity, otherwise 
 pain, inflammation, and other bad consequences, may 
 probably ensue. This practice, however, will be very 
 troublesome, because it will be difficult to file a loose 
 Tooth. At last the Tooth will drop out, which wilt 
 put an end to all farther trouble. 
 
 If the Alveoli have really been destroyed, in those 
 cases of loose Teeth which have become firm again, it 
 would be difficult to ascertain whether they have a 
 power of renewing themselves, analogous to that power 
 by which they first grow, or whether the fastening be 
 effected by a closing of the Gum and Process to the 
 Teeth. When the disease arises from the scurvy, the first 
 attempt must be to cure that disease; and afterwards the 
 above local treatment may be of service. 
 
 Together with drawing blood from the Gums, 
 astringents have always been used to harden them. But 
 when the disease does not arise from a constitutional 
 cause, which may be removed, (such as the sea-scurvy 
 or salivation) but from a disposition in the parts them¬ 
 selves, I have seen little relief given by them. 
 
 • 1 / .• , 
 
 The tincture of myrrh, tincture of Peruvian bark, 
 
 and sea-water, are some of the applications which have 
 been recommended,. 
 
 ' IflL 
 
OF THE ALVEOLAR PRO GASSES, &c. 183 .: 
 
 In such cases, I have seen considerable benefit from 
 the use of the tincture of bark and laudanum, in the 
 proportion of two parts of the tincture of bark to one 
 of the laudanum; and this to be used frequently, and 
 at each time to be kept in the mouth during ten„ 
 fifteen, or twenty minutes. 
 
 • 3201 ) j fa . JOT-^ v if.: : 
 
 & --V-:-.- X Hi; I3HJ2Jflw . 
 C/ w,'tj j£.i(j ■ OJ ivt/020•£’ax 
 
 if «, , - J + __ t;- .T 
 
 *KJ .‘--ill* - ; 1 . I 
 
 ■ 
 
 o:! 88t>ooiH bri£ 
 
 • i • • • i i .'{<!•/ 
 
 w’lljf SDHiWTJj li 
 
 f;i A * . • 1 ‘ cyvl c^-v.. 
 
 •v* • 
 
 O / 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 - i. 
 
 CHAP* 
 
 * l U;:ju iAi 
 
 a. ; 
 
 -F38 bnr 
 
 7 / < 
 
 * \ + ■ i 
 
 ' *■ if .jL'J * 
 
 i * 
 
18 + 
 
 OF -THE DISEASES 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of the Diseases of the Gums , and the Consequences of them. 
 
 ! v 
 
 i ‘ 7 
 
 Ti: 
 
 SECT. I. 
 
 f Vh>?C\J V. 
 
 
 * 
 
 the scurvy or the gums (vulgarly so called). 
 
 
 rn 
 
 1 H E Gums are extremely subject to diseases, the 
 symptoms of which, in an advanced state of them, 
 are in general such as were described in the preceding 
 chapter. 
 
 
 They swell, become extremely tender, and bleed 
 upon every occasion ; which circumstances being some¬ 
 what similar to those observable in the true Scurvy, the 
 disease has generally been called a Scurvy in the 
 Gums. 
 
 But as this seems to be the principal way in which 
 the Gums are affected, I suspect that the same symp¬ 
 toms may arise from various causes; as I have often 
 seen the same appearances in children, evidently of a 
 
 scrofulous 
 
OF THE GUMS. 185 
 
 scrofulous habit; and have also suspected them in 
 grown people : they likewise frequently appear in 
 persons who are, in all other respects, perfectly 
 
 When the Gums first begin to have a tenderness, we 
 may observe it first on their edges : the common smooth 
 skin of the Gum is not continued to its very edge, but 
 becomes at the edge a little rough like a border, and 
 somewhat thickened. The part of the Gum between 
 two Teeth swells, and often pushes out like luxuriant 
 flesh, which, is frequently very tender. 
 
 The inflammation is often carried so far as to make the 
 the Gums ulcerate ; so that the Gums in many cases have 
 a common ulcer upon them; by which process a part 
 of the Teeth are denuded. This is often on one part 
 only, often only on, one jaw; while in some cases it is 
 on. the whole Gums on both jaws. 
 
 In this case it often happens,, that the Alveolar. 
 Process disappears, after the manner above described 
 (see page 48), by taking part in the inflammation, either 
 from the same cause, or from sympathy. In such 
 cases there is always a very considerable discharge of 
 matter from the inside of the Gum and Alveolar 
 
 Process,. 
 
 10 * * • i ' 'i > • * 
 
OF THE DISEASES 
 
 Process, which always takes the course of the Tooth 
 for its exit. 
 
 In many of these cases we find, that while the Gums 
 are ulcerating in one part, they are swelling and 
 becoming spongy in another, and hanging loose upon 
 the Teeth; and this often takes place where there is 
 no ulceration in any part. 
 
 The treatment proper in this disease, where the Gums 
 become luxuriant from a kind of tumefaction, is generally 
 to cut away all the redundant swellings of the Gum. 
 I have seen several instances where this has succeeded ; 
 but still I am inclined to think, that this is not the best 
 practice ; for it is not that an adventitious substance 
 is thus removed, as in the case of luxuriant granulations, 
 from a sore, but a part of the Gum itself is destroyed, 
 in like manner as a part enlarged by inflammation may 
 be reduced by the knife to its natural size ; which would 
 certainly be bad practice. I should suspect, that the 
 good arising from such practice is owing to the bleed¬ 
 ing which takes place ; especially, as I have found from 
 experience, that simply scarifying the Gums has an¬ 
 swered the same purpose. Where there are reasons for 
 supposing it to arise from a peculiarity in the constitu¬ 
 tion, the treatment should be such as will remove this 
 peculiarity. 
 
 If 
 
OF THE GUMS. 
 
 187 
 
 If the constitution is scorbutic, it must be treated 
 with a view to the original disease. If scrofulous, local 
 treatment, by wounding the parts, may do harm; but 
 sea-bathing, and washing the mouth frequently with 
 sea-water, are the most powerful means of cure that I 
 know. 
 
 o nno 
 
 ff. 
 
 * u r~ 
 
 on 
 
 l. 2 r nL 
 
 2IXU 
 
 I 
 
 yen 
 
 ' V 
 
 ixnuy 
 
 vixe 
 r 
 
 b • ■ 1 ■ 
 
 • 
 
 ■ ’ v i \ [ 
 
 
 
 •“t * ■ 
 
 j> ilXC) II Lli 
 
 iiifxsA ora 
 
 i . »r 
 
 9 a) , 11,6 
 
 v£wn 5 in 
 
 rent iimva 
 
 »b naas ay 
 
 - i--,-d , r ’ 
 
 v' i './IXi 1 JU 11 
 
 ms I fills 
 
 fdn «r' If 
 
 • 
 
 TiVt * 
 
 , J*, 
 
 a iii! t ?i 
 )TOS B moil 
 
 biripv/jioufw .f os>ic iirinrs/- ? 
 
 ■ r t 
 
 aiind arli vd haouh 
 
 3fii 3 srb Joans m hi uo & I 
 
 ' X 
 
 
 in bad ad vl,:i 
 
 d»f nr 
 flXX 1 U 
 
 fima. 
 
 ant or j>nlw< 
 
 Di 
 
 s U 
 
 moiVfertfJol- avsrf f bk c y t 3<jga * * oox 
 
 -ns sd BmiiD arfo gmyinjeoa vfqrrii 
 
 ■ , . g k 
 
 •ijtjtkd aiir xn y ii.Tsilii'^ 0 /.] e mo 
 
 i-j* ■ 
 
 . if • * • • ♦ ■ ; \* v :> t? .f ■. >.■' > 
 
 * # T JiV fc \ •- i < V.. •!-* ( , v* 
 
 5 
 
 ■ 
 
 SECT. 
 
 4 
 
 « 
 
OP THE DISEASES 
 
 *' 
 
 SECT. II. 
 
 * 
 
 CALLOUS TUICKEKINGS OF THE GUMS. 
 
 rnr^ 
 
 I HE 
 stracted 
 Teeth ; 
 subject. 
 
 Gums are also subject to other diseases, ab- 
 from their connexion with the Alveoli and 
 which do not wholly belong to our present 
 
 A very common one is the thickening of the Gum 
 in some particular place, of a hard callous nature, 
 similar to an excrescence. Many of these have a 
 cancerous appearance, which deters the surgeon from 
 meddling with them ; but in general, without reason. 
 
 They may be often removed by the knife, but not 
 always. The bleeding, which follows, is generally so 
 considerable, that it is frequently necessary to apply the 
 actual cautery. 
 
 They sometimes grow again, which subjects the 
 patient to the same operation. I have known them 
 extracted six times; but, in such cases, I suspect that 
 
 they 
 
 / 
 
 
OF THE GUMS. 
 
 m 
 
 they really have a cancerous disposition; at least, it has 
 been so in two cases which have fallen under my 
 observation. 
 
 But here the skill of the surgeon, rather than that 
 of the dentist, is required. 
 
 
 N 
 
 Bb 2 
 
 CHAP. 
 
190 
 
 OF THE DISEASES 
 
 C II A P. IV. 
 
 Of Nervous Pains in the Jaws. 
 
 
 1 HERE is one disease of the Jaws which seems 
 in reality to have no connexion with the Teeth, but of 
 which the Teeth are generally suspected to be the 
 cause. This deserves to be taken notice of in this place, 
 because operators have frequently been deceived by it, 
 and even sound Teeth have sometimes been extracted 
 through an unfortunate mistake. 
 
 This pain is seated in some one part of the Jaws. 
 As simple pain demonstrates nothing, a Tooth is often 
 suspected, and is perhaps drawn out; but still the 
 pain continues, with this difference however, that it 
 now seems to be in the root of the next Tooth : it is 
 then supposed either by the patient, or the operator, 
 that the wrong Tooth was extracted ; wherefore, that 
 in which the pain now seems to be, is drawn, but 
 with as little benefit. I have known cases of this kind, 
 where all the Teeth of the affected side of the Jaw 
 have been drawn out, and the pain has continued in 
 
OF THE JAWS. • 
 
 b i 
 
 the Jaw ; in others, it has had a different effect, the 
 sensation of pain has become more diffused, and has 
 at last attacked the corresponding side of the tongue. 
 In the first case, I have known it recommended to cut 
 down upon the Jaw, and even to perforate and cauterise 
 it, but all without effect. 
 
 Hence it should appear, that the pain in question 
 does not arise from any disease in the part, but is entirely 
 a nervous affection. 
 
 It is sometimes brought on, or increased, by affections 
 of the mind, of which I once saw a remarkable instance 
 in a young lady. 
 
 It often has its periods, and these are frequently very 
 regular. 
 
 The regularity of its periods gives an idea of its 
 being a proper case for the bark, which however fre¬ 
 quently fails. 
 
 ^ r* rl w » ' ■. ^ 
 
 I have seen cases of some years standing, where the 
 hemlock has succeeded, when the bark has had no 
 effect; but sometimes all attempts prove unsuccess¬ 
 ful. Sea-bathing has been in some cases of singular 
 service, 
 
 5 ; 7 s 
 
 CHAP, 
 
15>2 
 
 OF THE DISEASES 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the Extraneous Matter upon the Teeth . 
 
 
 JL HERE are parts of the Tooth which lie out of 
 the way of friction, viz. the angles made by two 
 Teeth, and the small indentation between the Tooth and 
 Gum. 
 
 Into these places the juices are pressed, and there 
 stagnate, giving them at first the appearance of being 
 stained or dirty. A Tooth in this stage is generally 
 clean for some way from its cutting edge, towards, 
 the gum, on account of the motion of the lips 
 upon it, and the pressure of the food, &c. It is also 
 pretty clean close to the Gum, from the motion of the 
 loose edge of the Gum upon that part; but this 
 circumstance is only observable in those who have their 
 Gums perfectly sound; for in others, this loose edge 
 of the Gum is either lost, or no longer retains its free 
 motion. 
 
 If art be not now used, as the natural motion of the 
 parts is not sufficient, the incrustation increasing covers 
 
 more 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 ; .■ "■ ' ' v r v.> 
 
 
 more and more of the Teeth. As mastication generally 
 keeps that part clear which is near to the edges and 
 grinding surfaces, and as the motion of the lips in 
 some measure retards its growth outwards, it accumu¬ 
 lates on the parts above mentioned, till it rises almost 
 as high as the Gum: its growth being now retarded 
 in that direction, it accumulates on the edge next to the 
 Gum, so that in time it passes over the Gum, of which 
 it covers a greater or less portion. When it has increased 
 so much as to touch the Gum (which very soon hap¬ 
 pens, especially in the angle between the Teeth), it pro¬ 
 duces ulceration of that part, and a train of bad conse¬ 
 quences. Often the Gums receding from this matter* 
 become very tender and subject to hemorrhage. 
 
 The Alveolar Processes frequently take part with 
 the Gums, and ulcerate; so that the Teeth are left with¬ 
 out their support, and at last drop out, similarly to the 
 diseases of these parts already described. 
 
 All our juices contain a considerable quantity of calca¬ 
 reous earth, which is dissolved in them, and which 
 is separated from them upon exposure, which continues 
 mixed with the Mucus; so that the extraneous matter 
 consists of earth and the common secreted Mucus 
 
 !. This 
 
 * Vide Natural History, page 125, in the Note, for a further description of this. 
 
OF THE DISEASES 
 
 This disposition of the juices of the mouth to abound 
 so much with earth, seems to be peculiar to some 
 people, perhaps to some constitutions; but I have not 
 been able to ascertain what these are. We find persons 
 who seem to have nothing particular, either in constitu¬ 
 tion or way of life, so subject to this accumulation, 
 that the common methods of prevention, such as 
 washing and brushing the Teeth, have not the desired 
 effect. 
 
 The disposition is so strong in some people, that the 
 concretion forms on the whole body of the Tooth; 
 I have seen it even on the grinding surface of the 
 Molar es, and often two or three Teeth are cemented 
 together with it. This I think could only happen to 
 those who seldom or never use these Teeth. It is very apt 
 to accumulate on a Tooth, the opposite of which is lost. 
 
 I once saw a case of this kind, where the accumula¬ 
 tion, which was on a grinder, appeared like a tumour 
 on the inside of the mouth, and made a rising in the 
 cheek, which was supposed by every one that felt it, to 
 be a scirrhous tumour forming on the cheek ; but it- 
 broke off, and discovered what it was. 
 
 . , •> • j i ; t i . V / f 
 
 This accumulation is very apt to begin during a fit 
 of sickness, when the extraneous juices are allowed 
 
 to 
 
OF THE TEETH* 
 
 to rest ; and perhaps the juices themselves may have at 
 this time a greater tendency to produce the incrusting 
 matter. 
 
 It may also arise from any circumstance which pre¬ 
 vents a person from eating solids, whereby the different 
 parts of the mouth have less motion on each other, 
 Lying-in women are instances of this ; not to mention 
 that the assistance of art in keeping the Teeth clean is 
 commonly wanting under such circumstances. 
 
 The adventitious substance, as was said before, is 
 composed of mucus or animal juices, and calcareous 
 earth ; the earth is attached to and crystallized upon 
 the Tooth, and the mucus is entangled in these 
 crystals. 
 
 / * * 
 
 The removal of this adventitious matter is a part 
 in which the dentist ought to be very cautious : he 
 should be perfectly master of the difference between the 
 natural or original Tooth, and the adventitious matter ; 
 and he should be sensible of the propriety of saving as 
 much as possible of the Tooth, and at the same time 
 take pains to remove all that which is not naturah 
 Many persons have had their teeth wholly spoiled by an 
 injudicious treatment of them in this respect* 
 
196 OF THE DISEASES 
 
 As the cause of this incrustation is not either a 
 known disease of the constitution, or of the parts, but 
 depends on a property of the matter secreted, simply as 
 inanimate matter, the remedy of course becomes either 
 mechanical or chemical, 
 
 The mechanical remedies are friction, filing, and 
 picking. The first is sufficient, when the Teeth are only 
 beginning to be discoloured ; or, when already clean, 
 they may be thus kept clean. Various are the methods 
 proposed ; to wash them with cold water, and at the 
 same time to rub them with a piece of cloth on the 
 fore finger, has been thought sufficient by some; others 
 have recommended the dust of a burnt cork, burnt 
 bread, &c. with a view to act with more power on the 
 adventitious matter, than what can be applied by the 
 means of a soft brush or cloth* 
 
 In cases where this incrustation has been more consi¬ 
 derable, powders of various kinds have been employed, 
 such as tartar, bole, and many others. 
 
 Cream of tartar is often used, which at the same 
 time that it acts mechanically, has likewise a chymical 
 power, and dissolves this matter* 
 
 Other mechanical means are instruments to pick, 
 scrape, and file off the calcareous earth; these should 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 m 
 
 only be made use of wlien it is in large quantities, and 
 with great caution, r as the Teeth may be somewhat 
 loose; or, a part of the Tooth may be broken off with 
 the incrustation. 
 
 The chymical means are solvents: these are either 
 alkalies or acids. The alkaline salt will answer very well 
 early in the disease ; for the crust in the first stage con¬ 
 sists chiefly of mucus, which the alkali will remove very 
 readily ; but it should not be used too freely, as it rather 
 softens the Gums, and makes them extremely tender. 
 
 iGLSi' off? 
 
 Acids are also employed with success, as they dissolve 
 the earth, but are attended with this disadvantage, 
 that they act with more force upon the Tooth itself, 
 dissolving part of it, which is to be avoided, if possible; 
 for no part of a sound Tooth can be spared. 
 
 We may observe, that people who eat a good deal of 
 salad or fruit, have their Teeth much cleaner than 
 common ; which is owing to the acids in those fruits; 
 and for the same reason people’s Teeth are commonly 
 cleaner in summer than winter, in those countries where 
 there is a great plenty of fruit. When the accumulation 
 has been considerable, the Teeth and Gums will feel 
 tender on the removal of this matter, and even be affected 
 by cold air ; but this will not be of long continuance. 
 
 C c a CHAP* 
 
OF THE - IRREGULARITY 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of the Irregularity of the Teeth. 
 
 As that part of each jaw, which holds the ten fore¬ 
 teeth, is exactly of the same size when it contains 
 those of the first set, as when it contains those of the 
 second ; and as these last often occupy a much larger 
 space than the first* ;>in such cases the second set are 
 obliged to stand very irregularly. 
 
 This happens much oftener in the upper jaw, than 
 in the lower ; because, the difference of the size of the 
 two sets is much greater in that jaw. 
 
 This irregularity is observed almost solely in the 
 Incisores and Cuspidati; for they are the only Teeth 
 which are larger than their predecessors. 
 
 It most frequently happens to the Cuspidati, because 
 they are often formed later than the Bicuspides; in 
 consequence of which, the whole space is taken up 
 before they make their appearance : in such cases they 
 
 are 
 
 * Vide Natural History? p, ioj, 102, PI. 6 . fig. 2. 
 
OF THE TFFTU 
 
 IW' 
 
 are obliged to shoot forwards or outwards over the 
 second Incisor. However, it frequently happens to the 
 Incisores, but seldom to such a degree. This arises 
 often from the temporary cuspidatus of one or both sides 
 standing firm. I have seen the irregularities so much as. 
 to appear like a double row. 
 
 The Bicuspidati generally have sufficient room ta> 
 grow, because even more space than what they can 
 occupy, is kept for them by the temporary grinders*. 
 This however is not universally the case; for I have 
 seen where the Bicuspidati were obliged to grow out of 
 the circle, very probably from their being later in 
 growing than common. 
 
 That it is from want of room in the jaw, and not 
 from any effect that the first set produce upon them 
 is evident ; first, because in all cases of irregularity 
 we find that there is really not room in the jaw, to 
 allow of placing all the Teeth properly in the circle; 
 so that some are necessarily on the outside of the circle, 
 others within it; while others are turned with their, 
 edges obliquely as it were,, warped ; and secondly, be¬ 
 cause the Bicuspides are not out of the circle, although 
 they are as much influenced by the first set as any of 
 the others, 
 
 * Vide Natural History, page 
 
 As 
 
too OF THE IRREGULARITY 
 
 As they are not influenced by the first set, it cannot 
 be of any service to draw the first possesor; for that 
 gives way in the same proportion as the other ad¬ 
 vances. As the-succeeding Tooth, however, is broader, 
 it often interferes with a Shedding-tooth next to it, 
 the fang of which not being influenced by the growth 
 of its own succeeding Tooth, it does not decay in 
 proportion as the other advances; and therefore the 
 drawing of the adjoining Shedding-tooth is often of 
 service*. 
 
 In cases of considerable irregularity, for want of 
 room, a principal object is to remove those which 
 are most out of their place, and thereby procure 
 room for the others, which are to be brought into the 
 circle. 
 
 To extract an irregular Tooth would answer but 
 little purpose, if no alteration could be made in the 
 situation of the rest; but we find that the very principle 
 upon which Teeth are made to grow irregularly, is 
 capable, if properly directed, of bringing them even 
 again. This principle is the power which many parts 
 (especially bones) have of moving out cf the way of 
 mechanical pressure. 
 
 The 
 
 * Vide Natural Hist, page 107, 
 
OF THE TEETH. 
 
 20 1 
 
 The irregularity of the Teeth is at first owing to 
 mechanical pressure; for one Tooth getting the start of 
 another, and fixing firmly in its place, becomes a resist¬ 
 ance to the young, loose, forming Tooth, and gives 
 it an oblique direction. The same principle takes place 
 in a completely formed Tooth, whenever a pressure is 
 made upon it. Probably a Tooth might by slow 
 degrees be moved to any part of the mouth ; for I have 
 seen the Cuspidati pressed into the place of the 
 Incisores. However, it is observed, that the Teeth are 
 easier moved backwards than forwards; and when moved 
 back, that they are permanent, but often, when moved 
 forwards, they are very apt to recede. 
 
 The best time for moving the Teeth is in youth, 
 while the jaws have an adapting disposition ; for, after 
 a certain time, they do not so readily suit themselves 
 to the irregularity of the Teeth. This we see plainly 
 to be the case, when we compare the loss of a Tooth 
 at the age of fifteen years, and that of thirty or forty. 
 In the first case, we find that the two neighbouring 
 Teeth approach one another, in every part alike, till 
 they all close; but in the second, the distance in the jaw, 
 between the two neighbouring Teeth, remains the same, 
 while the bodies will in a small degree incline to one 
 another from want of lateral support,* 
 
 And 
 
 * Vide Natural. Hist. Plate XVI. Fig. i 3 a 3 £ 3 c» 
 
OF THE IRREGULARITY 
 
 20 $ 
 
 And this circumstance of the bodies of the Teeth 
 yielding to pressure upon their base, shews that, even 
 in the adult, they might be brought nearer to one 
 another by art properly applied. 
 
 As the operation of moving the Teeth is by lateral 
 pressure upon their bodies, these bodies must first have 
 passed through -the gum sufficiently for a hold to be 
 taken. 
 
 The best time seems to be, when the two grinders 
 of the child have been shed; for at this time a natural 
 alteration is taking place in that part of the jaw. 
 
 The means of making this pressure I shall only 
 slightly describe, as they will greatly vary according to 
 circumstances; so considerably indeed, that scarcely 
 two cases are to be treated alike, and in general the 
 dentists are tolerably well acquainted with the methods. 
 
 In general, it is done with ligatures or plates of 
 silver. The ligatures answer best when it is only 
 required to bring two Teeth closer together, which are 
 pretty much in the circle. The trouble attending this 
 fs but trifling, as it is only that of having them tied 
 onee a week or fortnight. 
 
 Where 
 
OF THE T EFT ft 
 
 Where Teeth, growing out of the circle, are to he 
 brought into it, curved silver plates, of a proper con¬ 
 struction, must be used. These ate generally made to 
 act on three points, two fixed points on the standing 
 Teeth, and the third on the Tooth which is to be 
 moved. That part of the plate which rests on the 
 two standing Teeth must be of a sufficient length for 
 that purpose, while the curved part is short, and goes 
 on the opposite side of the Tooth to be moved. Its 
 effect depends very much on the attention of the 
 patient, who must frequently press hard upon it with 
 the Teeth of the opposite jaw; so that this method 
 is much more troublesome to the patient than the 
 ligature. 
 
 It is impossible to give absolute directions what 
 Tooth or Teeth ought to be pulled out. That must 
 be left to the judgment of the operator $ blit the fol¬ 
 lowing general hints may be of service: 
 
 1. If there is any one Tooth very much out of the 
 row, and all the others regular, that Tooth may be 
 removed, and the two neighbouring ones brought closer 
 together. 
 
 2 . If there are two or more Teeth of the same side 
 very irregular {as, for instance, the second Incisor and 
 
 D d Cuspidatus}* 
 
o 0 4 OF THE IRREGULARITY 
 
 Cuspidatus), and it appears to be of no consequence 
 with respect to regularity, which of them is removed, 
 I should recommend the extraction of the farthest back 
 of the two, viz. the Cuspidatus; because, if there should 
 be any space, not filled up, when the other is brought 
 into the row, it will not be so readily seen. 
 
 3, If the above-mentioned two Teeth are not in the 
 circle, but still not far out of it, and yet there is not 
 room for both; in such a case I would recommend the 
 extraction of the first Bicuspis, although it should be 
 perfectly in the row, because the two others will then 
 be easily brought into the circle; and, if there is any 
 space left, it will be so far back as not to be at all 
 observable. 
 
 The upper jaw is often rather too narrow from side 
 to side, near the anterior part which supports the fore 
 Teeth, and projects forwards considerably over the lower, 
 giving the appearance of the rabbit-mouth, although 
 the Teeth be quite regular in the circle of the jaw. 
 
 In such a case it is necessary to draw a Bicuspis of 
 each, side, by which means the fore part of the circle 
 will fall back ; and if a cross bar was to be stretched 
 from side to side across the roof of the mouth, between 
 cuspis and cuspis, it would widen the circle. The 
 
 fore 
 
OF THE TEETH. 205 
 
 v ;• A. J D J S'il ,'df H *) ‘i •> . oj! 
 
 fore Teeth might also be tied to this bar, which would 
 be a means of assisting nature in bringing them back. 
 This has been practised, but it is troublesome. 
 
 As neither the bodies nor the fangs of the Teeth are 
 perfectly round, we find that this circumstance often 
 becomes a cause of their taking a twist; for, while 
 growing, they may press with one edge only on the 
 completely formed Tooth; by which means they will be 
 turned a little upon their centre. 
 
 The alteration of these is more difficult than of 
 the former, for it is in general impossible to apply, so 
 long and constantly as is necessary for'such an opera¬ 
 tion, any pressure that has the power of turning the 
 Tooth upon its centre. However, in the Incisores, it 
 may be done by the same powers which produce the 
 lateral motion; but where these cannot be applied, as is 
 frequently the case, the Tooth may be either pulled 
 out entirely, and put in again even, or it may be 
 twisted round sufficiently to bring it into a proper 
 position, as hath been often practised. 
 
 It may not be improper, in this place, to take notice of 
 a case which frequently occurs. It is a decay of the 
 first adult grinder at an early age, viz. before the tem¬ 
 porary grinders are shed, and before the second grinder 
 
 D d 2 of 
 
206' • OT THE IRREGULARITY, &e. 
 
 of the adult has made its appearance through the gum; 
 In this case, I would recommend removing the diseased 
 Tooth immediately, although it may occasion no kind 
 of trouble; for, if it be drawn before the temporary 
 grinders are shed, and before the second adult grinder 
 has cut the gum, it will in a short time not be missed; 
 because the bicuspis of that side will fall a little back, , 
 and the second and third grinders will come a little 
 forward ; by which means the space will be filled up,., 
 and these Teeth will be well supported*, Besides, the, 
 
 O 
 
 removal of this Tooth will make room for the fore. 
 Teeth, which is often very much wanted* especially in 
 the upper jaw. 
 
 f • ? X % X 
 
 jDOQOJT o 
 
 I 
 
 dU X jl ' 1 U.'J U 
 
 
 ' *: 
 
 - v A <# Mt w v a < 
 
 
 
 gjIHOct crT£it(? 3n 
 
 sVZDki, 
 
 \ 
 
 char; 
 
 

 \TTTX& .nrOTTSTStt 371T ’TO ^ 
 
 - Tsii rf-oriojrf? "J3/rd;x^qcrs &i objsm ?biI 3lrJ5'£ oxk io- 
 
 D v> ' i 1 
 
 j^aib nnivomoi bnerrjxnooei throw X ,$?,£;> eirfit nT_ 
 
 7 
 
 V*T Pli 
 
 CHAP. fir. 
 
 
 . i V*f 
 
 0 /* Irregularities between the Teeth and "Jaw, 
 
 <£ " r “ 
 
 ft: 
 
 ERTAIN disproportions, between the Teeth and : 
 Jaw, sometimes occur ; one of which is, when the 
 Body of the lower Jaw is not of sufficient length for 
 all the Teeth; In such cases, the last grinder never 
 gets perfectly from under the coronoide process, its 
 anterior edge only being uncovered ; and the gum ? , 
 
 which still in part lies upon the Tooth, is rubbed 
 
 * 
 
 against the sharp points of the Tooth, and is often* 
 squeezed between the Tooth upon which it lies, and 
 the corresponding one of the upper jaw. This occasions 
 so much uneasiness to the patient, that it becomes 
 necessary to relieve the gum, if possible,, by dividing 
 it freely in several places, that it may shrink and leave 
 this surface of the Tooth wholly uncovered. If this 
 does not answer, which is sometimes the case, it is 
 adviseable to draw the Tooth. 
 
 Sometimes, although but seldom, an inconvenience 
 arises from the dentes - sapientice being in the upper 
 Jaw, and not in the lower; these Teeth pressing upon 
 
 the 
 
208 
 
 ' . • ^ - 1 
 
 • - '• • ' 
 
 OF SUPERNUMERARY TEETH. 1 
 
 the anterior part of the root of the coronoide process, 
 when the mouth is shut; for the coronoide processes 
 are farther forwards in such cases, than when the 
 lower jaw also has its dentes sapientice: in short, the 
 exact correspondence between the two jaws is not 
 kept up. 
 
 In such cases I know of no other remedy, but the 
 extraction of the Tooth. 
 
 ij f# LX* j $*■ •r. i 
 
 yt * t *■ ■ ^ 
 
 i" * * L v ... >*. • . /- -a . I 
 
 • 'I/iy.-'V " ' r > * iU ' * *- * '* * A .-w- v * * 
 
 Cy* Supernumerary Teeth . 
 
 * ’ * ' ■ * ' . 
 
 WHEN there are Supernumerary Teeth*, it will 
 
 in general be proper to have them drawn; for they are 
 commonly either troublesome, or disfigure the mouth, 
 
 ... . >.■' *- ■' 
 
 * Vide Natural History, page 105, 
 
 CHAP, 
 
 I 
 
. 
 
 
 CHAP. VIIL 
 
 Of the Under Jaw. 
 
 It is not uncommon to find the lower Jaw projecting 
 too far forwards, so that its fore Teeth pass before 
 those of the upper Jaw, when the mouth is shut*; 
 which is attended with inconvenience, and disfigures 
 
 the face. 
 
 i k < 
 
 This deformity can be greatly mended in young 
 people. The Teeth in the lower Jaw can be gradually 
 pushed back in those whose Teeth are not close, while 
 those in the upper can be gently brought forward; which 
 is by much the easiest operation. 
 
 These two effects are produced by the same mechanical 
 powers. While this position of the Jaw is only in a 
 small degree, so that the edges of the under Teeth can 
 be by the patient brought behind those of the upper, 
 it is in his own power to increase this, till the whole be 
 completed; that is, till the grinders meet; and it is 
 not necessary to go further. This is done by frequently 
 
 bringing 
 
 * Vide Natural History, page 70. 
 
c 2 30 
 
 OF THE UNDER JAW. 
 
 bringing the lower Jaw as far back as he can, and then 
 squeezing the Teeth as close together as possible. 
 
 But when it is not in the person’s power to bring the 
 lower Jaw so far back as to allow the edges of its fore 
 Teeth to come behind those of the upper, artificial 
 means are necessary'. 
 
 The best of these means is an instrument of silver, 
 with a socket or groove, shaped to the fore Teeth of the 
 lower Jaw, to receive them, so as to become fast to them, 
 and sloped off as it rises to its upper edge, so as to rise 
 behind the fore Teeth in the upper Jaw in such a manner, 
 that, upon shutting the mouth, the Teeth of the upper 
 Jaw may catch the anterior part of the slanting surface, 
 and be pushed forward with the power of the inclined 
 plane. The patient, who wears such an instrument, 
 must frequently shut his mouth with this view. 
 
 * # i' % 
 
 These need not be continued longer than till the edges 
 of the lower Teeth can be got behind those of the upper; 
 for it is then within the power of the patient, as in the 
 
 first-stated case. 
 
 CHAV, 
 
Of Drawing the Teeth . 
 
 The 
 
 extraction of Teeth is, in some cases, an 
 operation of considerable delicacy; and, in others, no 
 operation is less difficult. 
 
 Uid 
 
 As this is often not thought of till an inflammation 
 has come on, it becomes an object of consideration, 
 whether it be proper to remove the Tooth while that 
 inflammation continues, or to wait till it has subsided. 
 I am apt to believe, it is better to wait even till the 
 parts have perfectly recovered themselves, because the 
 state of irritation renders them more susceptible of pain. 
 The contrary practice might also appear reasonable; 
 for by removing the Tooth, it might be imagined that 
 we should remove the cause; but when the inflam¬ 
 mation has once begun, the effect will go on inde¬ 
 pendently of the cause; and to draw the Tooth, in 
 such a situation, is rather to produce a fresh cause, 
 than to remove the present. Of this I think an 
 
 E e instance 
 

 oio OF DRAWING 
 
 instance has occurred to me. However, most Teeth are 
 drawn in the height of inflammation ; and, as we do 
 not find any mischief from the operation, it is perhaps 
 better to do it when the resolution of the patient is the 
 greatest. The sensibility of the mind may even be less 
 at this time. 
 
 Teeth are easy or difficult of extraction, according as 
 they are fast or loose in their sockets ; in some degree 
 according to the kind of Tooth, and also, in some 
 degree, with reference to their situation*. 
 
 They are naturally so fast as to require instruments, 
 and the most cautious and dexterous hand ; and yet are 
 sometimes loose enough to be pulled out by the fingers. 
 
 When the sockets and gums are considerably decayed, 
 and the Tooth or Teeth very loose, it would in most 
 cases be right to perform extraction ; for when they are 
 allowed to stay, and perhaps are kept in their proper 
 place, by being tied to the neighbouring Teeth, they 
 then act upon the remaining gum ana socket as extra¬ 
 neous bodies, producing ulceration there, and making 
 those parts recede much farther than they naturally 
 would have done, if the Tooth had been drawn earlier ; 
 
 which 
 
 * For farther directions, vide Natural History, page 122, 
 
THE TEETH. 
 
 013 
 
 which produces two bad effects; it weakens the lateral 
 support of the two neighbouring Teeth, and it ren¬ 
 ders it more difficult to fix an artificial Tooth. But 
 unless these two last circumstances are forcibly im¬ 
 pressed upon the patient, it is hardly possible to 
 persuade him to consent to the loss of a Tooth while 
 it has any hold, especially a tooth which appears 
 sound. 
 
 The extraction should never be done quick ; for this 
 often occasions great mischief, breaking the Tooth or 
 jaw; on the same principle as a bullet going against 
 an open door with great velocity, will pass through it, 
 but, with little velocity, will shut it. 
 
 This caution is most necessary in adults, or in the 
 permanent Teeth*; for, in young subjects, where there 
 are only the temporary Teethf, the jaw, not being 
 so firm, the Tooth is not in much danger of being 
 brokenf. 
 
 E e 2 It 
 
 * Vide Natural History, page 83. 
 
 f Vide Natural History, page 98, Fig. XV. 
 
 % I must do Mr. Spence the justice to say, that this method appears to be peculiar to 
 him, and that he is the only operator I ever knew who would submit to be instructed, 
 or even allow an equal in knowledge} and I must do the same justice to both his 
 sons. 
 
OF DRAWING 
 
 £14 
 
 It is a common practice to divide the gum from 
 the Tooth before it is drawn, which is attended with 
 very little advantage ; because at best it can only be 
 imperfectly done, and that part of the gum which 
 adheres to the Tooth, decays when it is lost. But if 
 such a separation as can be made, saves any pain in 
 the whole of the operation, I should certainly recom¬ 
 mend it; and at least in some cases, it might prevent 
 the gum from being torn. It is also a common practice, 
 to close the gum, as it is termed : this is more for shew 
 than use ; for the gum cannot be made so close as to 
 unite by the first intention ; and therefore the cavity 
 from which the Tooth came, must suppurate like every 
 other wound. But, as the sensations of these parts are 
 adapted to such a loss, and as a process very different 
 
 from that which follows the loss of so much substance in 
 
 / 
 
 any other part of the body, is to take place; the conse¬ 
 quent inflammations and suppurations are not so violent*. 
 We may be allowed to call this a natural operation which 
 goes on in the Gum and Alveoli, and not a violence ; as 
 we see that the delivery of a young animal before its 
 time, which is similar to the drawing of a fixed Tooth, 
 in happening before all the containing parts are prepared 
 for the loss, produces considerable local violence, with¬ 
 out doing proportionable mischief. Therefore, in 
 general, it is very unnecessary to do any thing at all to 
 the gum. There 
 
 * Vide Natural History, on the decay of the Alveoli, page 7. 
 
 3 
 
THE TEETH. 
 
 215 
 
 There are some particular circumstances which natu¬ 
 rally, and others which accidentally attend and follow 
 the drawing of Teeth; but they are in general of no 
 great consequence. 
 
 There follows a bleeding from the vessels of the socket, 
 and those passing between it and the Teeth*. This com¬ 
 monly is but trifling; however, instances have occurred 
 where it has been very considerable, and the aukwardness 
 of the situation makes it very difficult to stop it. In 
 general, it will be sufficient to stuff the socket with lint, 
 or lint dipped in the oil of turpentine, and to apply a 
 compress of lint, or a piece of cork, thicker than the 
 bodies of the adjacent Teeth ; so that the Teeth in the 
 apposite jaw may keep up a pressure. 
 
 It has been advised to stuff into the socket some soft 
 wax, on a supposition that it would mould itself to the 
 cavity, and so stop the bleeding; this perhaps may 
 sometimes answer better than the other method, and 
 therefore should be tried when that fails. 
 
 It is scarcely possible to draw some Teeth without 
 breaking the Alveolar Processes. This in general is but 
 of little consequence, because, from the nature of the 
 union between the Teeth and sockets, these last can 
 
 scarcely 
 
 * Vide Natural History, page 41, 42, 43. Plate XII. 
 
OF DRAWING THE TEETH. 
 
 216 
 
 scarcely be broken farther than the points of the fang, 
 and in very few cases so far ; therefore little mischief can 
 ensue, as the fracture extends no farther than the part 
 of the socket which will naturally decay after the loss 
 of the Tooth ; and that part, which does not decay, will 
 be filled up as a basis for the gum to rest upon. It has 
 been supposed that the splinters do mischief. I very 
 much doubt this; for if they are not so much detached 
 as to lose the living principle, they still continue part 
 of our body, and are rounded off at their points as all 
 splinters are in other fractures, and particularly here, 
 for the reasons already assigned, viz. because this part has 
 a greater disposition for wasting. And if they are wholly 
 detached, they will either come away before the gum 
 contracts entirely, or, after it is closed, will act as an 
 extraneous body ; form a small abscess in the gum ; and 
 come out. 
 
 It sometimes happens that the Tooth is broken, and 
 its point, or more of the fang, is left behind, which is 
 very often sufficient to continue the former complaints ; 
 and therefore it should be extracted, if it can be done, 
 with care. If it cannot be extracted, the gum will in 
 part grow over it; and the Alveoli will decay as far as 
 where it is. The decaying principle of the socket will 
 produce the disposition to fill up at the bottom, whereby 
 the stump will be pushed out; but perhaps not till it 
 
 has 
 
TRANSPLANTING TEETH. <217 
 
 has given some fits of the Tooth-ach. However* this 
 circumstance does not always become a cause of the 
 
 Tooth-ach. 
 
 Transplanting Teeth . 
 
 Although this operation is in itself a matter 
 of no difficulty, yet, upon the whole, it is one of 
 the nicest of all operations, and requires more chirur- 
 gical and physiological knowledge than any that comes 
 under the care of the dentist. There are certain 
 cautions necessary to be observed, especially if it be a 
 living Tooth which is to be transplanted ; because in 
 that case it is meant to retain its life, and we have no 
 great variety of choice. Much likewise depends upon 
 the patient: he should apply early, and give the dentist 
 all the time he thinks necessary to get a sufficient number 
 of Teeth that appear to be of a proper size, &c. Like¬ 
 wise, he must not be impatient to get out of his hands 
 before it is adviseable. 
 
 The Incisores<> Cuspidati , and Bicuspides , can alone 
 be changed, because they have single fangs. The 
 success is greatest in the Inciscres and Cuspidati than the 
 Bicuspides , these last having frequently the ends of their 
 fangs forked ; from which circumstance the operation 
 will become less perfect. 
 
 It 
 
213 
 
 TRANSPLANTING TEETH. 
 
 It is hardly possible to transplant the grinders, as 
 the chance of fitting the sockets of them is very small. 
 When indeed a grinder is extracted, and the socket 
 sound and perfect, the dentist may, perhaps, be able to 
 fit it by a dead Tooth. 
 
 ihj / 701 JcBl c3H]IjJlTiOo flWOfl)! 9V.fc.rl 1 
 
 iiriuodujQwn 3n$ yd baJiooQi/g Ibw nodw /ilxi■ vjam 
 
 Of the State of the Gums and Sockets . 
 
 < V 
 
 The first object of attention is the Sockets and Gums 
 of the person who is to have the fresh Tooth. If the 
 Tooth, which is to be removed, be not wholly diseased, 
 there is great probability that the Socket will be as 
 sound and complete as ever ; but if the body of the 
 Tooth has been destroyed some time, and the fang has 
 been in the state of what is commonly called a stump, 
 it has most probably begun to decay on its outer 
 surface and point; in which case, the Socket will be 
 filled up in the same proportion: if so, there is no 
 possibility of success. But as, in the operation of trans¬ 
 planting, the diseased Tooth is to be first drawn, it 
 will shew the state of the Socket; and the Scion* 
 Tooth is to be left or drawn, according to the appearance 
 on the diseased one. 
 
 * **'^ , >*’ * ^ W| >3. r Mil C* J ^ > r. V* 1 . 
 
 If 
 
 * As the transplanting of Teeth is very similar to the ingrafting of trees, I 
 thought that term might be transferred from gardening to surgery, finding no other 
 expressive of the thing. 
 
TRANSPLANTING TEETH. 219 
 
 If the appearance be not favourable, and it there¬ 
 fore be not probable that the Scion Tooth can be intro¬ 
 duced, so as to unite in the place of a Stump, l 
 would recommend to every dentist to have some dead 
 Teeth at hand, that he may have a chance to fit the 
 Socket. I have known these sometimes last for years, 
 especially when well supported by the neighbouring 
 Teeth. Indeed, this very practice is recommended by 
 some dentists in preference to the other. But even 
 this should not be attempted, unless the Socket is sound 
 and pretty large, as the Tooth can otherwise have but 
 very little hold. 
 
 Whenever there are Gum-biles, I would not recom¬ 
 mend transplanting, as there is always in such cases 
 a diseased socket, although the disease has originated 
 in the Tooth. In one or two instances, indeed, which 
 I have seen, the Bile has been cured by such an 
 operation. 
 
 If the Gums are diseased, and become spongy, as 
 has been described, it will be very improper to transplant, 
 as there will be but little chance of success ; also, if 
 the Sockets have a disposition to waste, and the Tooth 
 becomes in some degree loose; in short, the Sockets 
 and Gums should be perfectly sound. No person 
 should have a Tooth transplanted, while taking mer¬ 
 cury, even although the Gums are not affected by it 
 
 F f at 
 
220 TRANSPLANTING TEETH. 
 
 at the time ; for they may become affected by that medi¬ 
 cine before the Tooth is fixed. I would carry this still 
 farther : no one should have a Tooth transplanted, who 
 has any complaint that may subject him to the taking 
 of mercury before the Tooth is well fixed. For this 
 reason, those who have Teeth transplanted, ought parti¬ 
 cularly to avoid for some time the chance of contracting 
 any complaint, for the cure of which mercury may be 
 necessary. 
 
 f 
 
 * * H i 1 y”’ ? j 
 
 I would not recommend transplanting, even where 
 mercury has been taken lately. How soon mercury 
 may be taken after a Tooth has been transplanted, is 
 not easily ascertained. I have known it fail from this 
 cause (as it seemed) after six weeks, where there was 
 every reason to suppose that it might have been attended 
 with success. 
 
 Of the Age of the Person who is to have the Scion Tooth . 
 
 * /"» , « , . f'' * » • r ' ", x f’S y • CA y*. , I k \ || 1 . 
 
 The Socket should be of its full size, and one or 
 two Grinders on each side of each jaw should be full 
 grown, to keep the two jaws at a proper distance, which 
 will allow the transplanted Tooth to be undisturbed by 
 the motion of the jaw while fastening. This will be at 
 the age of eighteen or twenty years. 
 
 f 
 
 It 
 
TRANSPLANTING TEETH. 
 
 OQ ^ 
 
 It sometimes however happens, that a fore Tooth 
 decays before this age, and even before it is completely 
 formed; and therefore all the above-mentioned advantages 
 cannot be had. In such cases, it is not very material 
 whether transplanting is practised or not, as simply to 
 draw the diseased Tooth will in most cases be sufficient ; 
 for the two neighbouring Teeth may be brought together, 
 so as to fill up the space, the others following in a less 
 degree, as has been already observed upon irregularities 
 of the Teeth. 
 
 Of the Scion Tooth . 
 
 , _ . * 1 k -j f f'TYt 7 ( \ f T i ■' 1 5 i K ’ V*T * ’"... 7 \ . / }' H 
 
 The Scion Tooth, or that which is to be transplanted, 
 should be a full grown young Tooth : young, because the 
 principle of life and union is much stronger in such than 
 in old ones. 
 
 It will be scarcely necessary to observe, that the new 
 Teeth should always be perfectly sound, and taken from 
 a mouth which has the appearance of that of a person 
 sound and healthy; not that I believe it possible to 
 transplant an infection of any kind from the circulating 
 juices; although we know from experience that it may be 
 done by a matter secreted from them. The Scion Tooth 
 should be less than what the Tooth was, the place of 
 
 F f 2 which 
 
coo TRANSPLANTING teeth. 
 
 which it is to supply. This cannot at first be known 
 with certainty, but it may in most cases be nearly ascer¬ 
 tained ; and that is, by judging from the sizes of the 
 bodies of the two Teeth; but as the fangs do not 
 always bear an exact proportion to the body, it some¬ 
 times happens that this method fails. Also, it is not 
 always in our power to judge after this manner; for in 
 some cases the body of the Tooth of the person who is 
 to have one transplanted shall be quite destroyed, the 
 fang only remaining : in these cases we must judge from 
 its correspondent on the opposite side; but even that 
 Tooth is sometimes destroyed. 
 
 It has been supposed, that we run no risk by taking 
 the Scion Tooth from a young subject; but this is no 
 security; for a complete Tooth is of the same size in the 
 young as the old*. To remedy this inconvenience as 
 much as possible, the Scion Tooth should be that of a 
 
 A . \ _ 
 
 female, for female Teeth are in general smaller than 
 those of men; but the inconvenience still remains, 
 whenever a female is the subject of this operation. 
 Some women have such small Teeth, that it is almost 
 impossible to fit them. When the fang of the Scion 
 Tooth is larger than that which it is intended to 
 supply, it must be made smaller, and only in that part 
 
 where 
 
 * Vide Natural History, page no, on the Growth of Teeth. 
 
» ' 
 
 TRANSPLANTING TEETH. g 23 
 
 where it exceeds. But the necessity of this should be 
 avoided, if possible ; for a Tooth that is filed has lost 
 all those inequalities which allow it to be held much 
 faster. If, however, some part must be removed, it 
 should be done so as to imitate the old Tooth as much 
 as possible. The best remedy is to have several people 
 ready, whose Teeth in appearance are fit; for if the 
 first will not answer, the second may. I am persuaded 
 this operation has failed, from a Tooth being forced 
 in too tmht : for let us reflect what must be the 
 consequence of such practice. A part of the soft 
 covering of the Tooth, or lining of the Socket, is 
 squeezed between two hard bones, so that all circulation 
 of juices is prevented ; a mortification in that part 
 takes place ; and in consequence of that a Gum-bile, 
 and the loss of all union between Tooth and Socket \ 
 so that the Tooth drops out. 
 
 IO 3u £>11/0112 fltOO I HOlDo 3fU c 0ldl28Oq 8£ HoUfft 
 
 v It will be hardly necessary to mention, that the 
 sooner the Scion Tooth is put into its place the better, 
 as delay will perpetually lessen the power upon which 
 the union of the two parts depends*. 
 
 * Vide Natural History of Teeth, page 126, 127, and 128, for an explanation 
 ©f the principle upon which the success of this operation depends. 
 
 Of 
 
224 
 
 TRANSPLANTING TEETH. 
 
 Of replacing a sound Tooth , when drawn by mistake . 
 
 It sometimes happens, that a Tooth is drawn, on an 
 idea that it is diseased, because it gives pain, but 
 appears after the extraction to be perfectly sound. In 
 such a case I would recommend the replacing it, that 
 there may be no loss by the operation; and the seat of 
 the pain will probably be removed to the next Tooth. 
 A Tooth beat out by violence, should be replaced in 
 the same manner. This ought to be done as soon 
 as possible; however, I would even recommend the expe¬ 
 riment twenty-four hours after the accident, or as long 
 as the Socket will receive the Tooth, which may be for 
 some days. 
 
 If the Tooth be replaced at any time before its life 
 is destroyed, it will reunite with the cavity of the 
 Socket, and be as fast as ever. 
 
 No Tooth is excepted from this practice; for although 
 in the Grinders there are more fangs than one, yet these 
 fangs will as readily go into their respective sockets as 
 one fang would ; and most probably, when the Tooth 
 
 has 
 

 TRANSPLANTING TEETH. 225 
 
 has been beat out, the Sockets are enlarged by their 
 giving way. 
 
 W • \ ~ .a • » , y, * ' rs '' ” 
 
 However, the Grinders are not so subject to such 
 accidents as the fore Teeth, both from their situation, 
 and from their firmness in the Sockets. 
 
 Where a Tooth has been only loosened, or shoved out 
 in part, the patient must not hesitate, but replace it 
 immediately. As a proof of the success to be expected 
 from replacing Teeth, I will relate the following case : 
 
 A gentleman had his first bicuspis knocked out, and 
 the second loosened. The first was driven quite into 
 his mouth, and he spit it out upon the ground ; but 
 immediately picked it up, and put it into his pocket. 
 Some hours afterwards he called upon me, mentioned 
 the accident, and shewed me the 1 ooth. Upon 
 examining his mouth, I found the second bicuspis very 
 loose, but pretty much in its place. The Toth, 
 which had been knocked out, was not quite dry, but 
 very dirty, having dropped on the ground, and having 
 been some time in his pocket. I immediately put it into 
 warm water, let it stay there to soften, washed it as 
 clean as possible, and then replaced it, first having 
 introduced a probe into the socket to break down the 
 coagulated blood which filled it. I then tied these 
 
 two 
 
TRANSPLANTING TEETH. 
 
 226 
 
 two Teeth to the first grinder and the cuspidatus with 
 silk, which was kept on some days, and then removed. 
 After a month, they were as fast as any Teeth in the 
 head; and, if it were not for the remembrance of the 
 circumstances above related, the gentleman would not 
 be sensible that his Teeth had met with any accident. 
 Four years have now passed since it happened. 
 
 Of transplanting a dead Tooth . 
 
 * 0 % 
 
 The insertion of a dead Tooth has been recom¬ 
 mended, and I have known them continue for many 
 years. If this always succeeded as well as the living, 
 I would give it the preference, because we are much 
 more certain of matching them, as a much greater 
 variety of dead Teeth can be procured than of living 
 ones. But they do not always retain their colour, but 
 are susceptible of stain. However, I have known them 
 last for years without any alteration; and some have 
 appeared rather to acquire a transparency, which dead 
 Teeth in general have not. 
 
 Of the bmnediate Fastening of a transplanted Tooth . 
 
 When a Tooth has been transplanted, the next thing 
 to be done is to fix it in that position in which it is 
 
 intended 
 
TRANSPLANTING TEETH. 
 
 intended to remain ; that is in general to the two neigh¬ 
 bouring Teeth, by means of silk or sea-meed. If it 
 is an Incisor or Cuspidatus , the silk should first be tied 
 to the neck of one of the neighbouring Teeth, as near 
 the Gum as possible; then the two ends of the silk 
 should be brought round upon the body of the Scion 
 Tooth, but not so near the Gum as in the former, and 
 tied there; then it should be brought round the neck 
 of the other neighbouring Tooth, as near the Gum as 
 possible, as in the first, and tied there. The reason of 
 the difference of the heights of the silk recommended, 
 must appear evident, it being our intention to keep the 
 Tooth close to the bottom of the Socket. 
 
 If the transplanted Tooth be a Bicuspis, the same mode 
 of tying may be followed; but the silk may be brought 
 over its grinding surface between the two points, by 
 which it will be better confined than in any other way. 
 It sometimes happens, that the body of the Scion Tooth 
 is either too long, too thick, or in such a position as to 
 be pressed upon by the Teeth of the opposite Jaw. 
 Great care should be taken to prevent this, as the oppo¬ 
 site Teeth constantly oppose the fastening of those which 
 are transplanted, in every motion of the Jaw. To 
 remedy this inconvenience, we have recommended 
 smaller Teeth than those lost; but even when they are 
 of a proper size in other respects, they shall in some 
 
 G g cases 
 
£0 S transplanting teeth. 
 
 ? «. u JL wl 1 X/ f A X A VI A O r i A vl 1 
 
 cases still touch the opposite Teeth. When this arises 
 from the length of the Tooth, a small portion may be filed 
 off from the cutting-edge with great safety. If it is 
 owing to the thickness of the Scion Tooth, and in the 
 upper Jaw, some part may be filed off the hollow or 
 concave surface of the Teeth, where the opposite touch. 
 When it is owing to the position of the Tooth, the same 
 thing may be done with propriety. By attending to 
 this circumstance in the tying, this inconvenience may' 
 in many cases be prevented ; however, if it should not 
 be in the power of the dentist to prevent it by the 
 above-mentioned method, then he should bring them 
 forwards by tying them to a silver plate* a little more 
 bent than the circle of the Teeth, and resting at each 
 end upon the neighbouring Teeth. 
 
 Where a Tooth does not exactly fit but is too short, 
 then there arises a difficulty with the patient, whether he 
 he ought to consult propriety or beauty. The Tooth 
 should be as much in the Socket as it can be with ease; 
 for, although in that case it is too short, appearances 
 must give way. 
 
 The patient must now finish the rest. He must be 
 particularly attentive at first, and give it as little motion 
 as possible. In many cases a soreness will continue 
 
 some 
 
TRANS PLAN TING TEE *T fl. ; 
 
 2 ?§ 
 
 some days, and the Gums will swell; in others there 
 
 will neither be soreness nor Swelling. 
 
 si .n j ■ ■ ' b^ - m rw ;mb3~nnit3u:) 3fk moii ••• 
 
 The patient must take great care not to catch cold, 
 or expose himself to any of the other common causes of 
 fever; for such accidents are very likely to prevent the 
 success of this operation. This caution is more necessary 
 in winter, than the summer. 
 
 The Tooth in some will begin to be fast in a few 
 days, and the Gum will cling close to it; while* in 
 others, many weeks will pass before this happens ; 
 though the Tooth may become fixed at last. 
 
 I have seen the transplanted Tooth come a little way 
 out of the Socket; and, without any art being used, 
 retire into it as far as at first. The silk is to be removed 
 sooner or later, according as the Tooth is more or less 
 fast; in some people after a fortnight, in others not till 
 some months after the operation. 
 
 This operation, like all others, is not attended with 
 certain success. It sometimes happens that the two 
 parts do not unite ; and in such cases the Tooth often 
 acts as an extraneous body*, and instead of fastening, 
 
 G g 2 the 
 
 v t v . ... ^ 
 
 * I say often, because I do not suppose that it always acts as an extraneous 
 body; because we know that dead Teeth have stood for years, without affecting 
 
 the 
 
£30 TRANSPLANTING T'EE THi 
 
 the Tooth becomes looser and looser : the gum swells, 
 and a considerable inflammation v is kept up, often 
 terminating in a Gum-bile. In some cases, where 
 it is not also attended v -with success, there are not these 
 symptoms: the parts appear pretty sound, only the 
 Teeth do not fasten, and sometimes drop out. 
 
 IQffllfiO 
 
 It also happens, that transplanted Teeth have a very 
 singular operation performed on them while in the Socket; 
 the living Socket and Gum finding this body kept in by 
 force, so that they cannot push it out, set about another 
 mode of getting rid of it, eating away the fang till the 
 whole is destroyed, exactly similar to the wasting of the 
 
 fangs of the temporary Teeth in the young subject*. 
 
 gfnvxi iaiuirta nocj j smeo ti'jjnw io ootu ni>ooq£ 
 
 I have all along supposed, that where this practice 
 is attended with success, there is a living union between 
 the Tooth and Socket, and that they receive their future 
 nourishment from this new master. My reasons for 
 supposing it were founded on experiments on other 
 partsf, in animals, and also observations made on the 
 practice itself: for first I observed that they kept their 
 colour, which is very different from that of a dead 
 
 Tooth y 
 
 Hi . *".f ; n n03*T3(T & ITlD? ■ |u(X)£,"/irr ;• £ ](:./] T 
 
 Sockets or Gums in the least. We may therefore suppose, that it is sometimes 
 
 the case with transplanted living Teeth. 
 
 * Vide Natural History, page^S, Plate X, Fig. 2. 
 f Vide Natural History, page 126. 
 
T R A JSh : Sf TEETER. 231 
 
 Tooth; for a living Tooth has a degree of transparency, 
 while a dead one is of an opaque chalky white. 
 
 • »'l X » ! } l * <> »J > IV i > \ J 111 ,‘:j ). . y .. I - J 
 
 Secondly, there are instances of their becoming 
 diseased, in the same manner as an original living 
 
 Tooth; at least the following ca$e favours strongly this 
 
 opinion. 
 
 9 m w m ' k t s r t" 1 It 
 
 In October , 1772, a gentleman, of the city of London , 
 had a Tooth transplanted, which was perfectly sound, 
 and fixed in its new Socket extremely well; about a 
 year and half after, two spots were observed on the 
 fore part of the body of the Tooth, which threatened 
 a decay, they were exactly similar to specks, or the first 
 appearance of decay, which come upon natural living 
 Teeth. Pain is also sometimes felt in the transplanted 
 Tooth. 
 
 JL » ' • » ’ 4 a. *4 wfv' & \ •-+ • t £ J’ f \ .■ . < v/ V/ _ v 3k ■■ + 
 
 But what puts it beyond a doubt is, that a living 
 Tooth, when transplanted into some living part of an 
 animal, will retain its life; and the vessels of the animal 
 shall communicate with the Tooth; as is shewn by the 
 following experiments. 
 
 I took a sound Tooth from a person’s head ; then made 
 a pretty deep wound with a lancet into the thick part of 
 a cock’s comb \ and pressed the fang of the Tooth into 
 
 this 
 
232 
 
 TRANSPLANTING TEETH. 
 
 this wound, and fastened it with threads passed through 
 other parts of the comb. The cock was killed some 
 months after j and I injected the head with a very minute 
 injection: the comb was then taken off, and put 
 into a weak acid, and the Tooth being softened by this 
 means, I slit the comb and Tooth into two halves, in 
 the long direction of the Tooth. I found the vessels of 
 the Tooth well injected, and also observed that the exter¬ 
 nal surface of the Tooth adhered every where to the 
 comb by vessels, similar to the union of a Tooth with 
 the Gum and Sockets*. 
 
 tdi .• gtitbod guoonfitfxs STigob owoz ni 9T■ sc| gnK?©li> 
 
 * I may here just remark, that this experiment is not generally attended with 
 success. I succeeded but once, out of a great number of trials. 
 
 OF 
 

 
 [ T % S T 0 
 
 
 ^ ft 
 
 
 if i 
 
 
 ■ j[nnr> ' 3 f 
 
 
 
 ft r - 
 
 ’»e 
 
 V 7T A JJT 
 
 •v V V1". 
 
 14 
 
 mmoD 
 
 rU 
 
 O -<?; 7 R<T 
 
 'ft 03 7C) 
 
 O F 
 
 ft V ‘ r '- r " ! '. 
 
 DENTITION. 
 
 TFeETH, at their first formation, and for some time 
 while growing, are completely inclosed within the Sockets 
 and Gums*, and in their growth they act upon the in- 
 closing parts in some degree as extraneous bodies; for 
 while the operation of growth is going on in them, ano¬ 
 ther operation is produced, which is a decay of that part 
 of the Gum and Socket that covers the Tooth, and 
 which becomes the cause of the very disagreeable and 
 even dangerous symptoms which attend this process. As 
 the Teeth advance in size, they are in the same propor¬ 
 tion pressing against these Sockets or Gums, from 
 whence inflammation and ulceration are produced. 
 
 That ulceration which takes place in Dentition, is 
 one of the species which seldom or never produces sup¬ 
 puration: however, in some few cases 1 have found the 
 
 Gums 
 
 * Vide Natural History, page 77 and 78, Plate XII. Fig. 3. 
 
OF DENTITION. 
 
 234 
 
 Gums ulcerated, and the body of the Tooth surrounded 
 with matter; but I believe this seldom happens till the 
 Tooth is near cutting the skin of the Gums. 
 
 As this is a disease of an early age, and indeed almost 
 begins with life, its symptoms are more diffused, more 
 general, and more uncertain at such an early period, 
 than those of any disorder of full-grown people, putting 
 on the appearance of a great variety of maladies; but 
 these symptoms become less various, and less hazardous, 
 as the child advances in years; so that the double Teeth 
 of the child, and still more so the second set of Teeth, 
 or those of the adult, are usually cut without producing 
 much disturbance. 
 
 These symptoms are so various in different children, 
 and often in the same child, that it is difficult to con¬ 
 ceive them to be from the same origin; and the varieties 
 are such as seem to be beyond our knowledge. 
 
 They produce both local and constitutional complaints, 
 with local sympathy. 
 
 The local symptoms we may suppose to be attended 
 with pain, which appears to be expressed by the child 
 when he is restless, uneasy, rubs his gums, and puts 
 every thing into his mouth. There is generally inflam¬ 
 mation. 
 
OF DENTITION. 
 
 mation, heat, and swelling of the Gums, and an in¬ 
 creased flow of saliva. 
 
 7 ** *- «■' . ' 
 
 * * * '' ■■ * +* ' ' - ‘ /♦. *.4 i.s a J x. * 1 /> ■ ; s J[j f i 
 
 The constitutional, or general consequential symptoms, 
 are fever, and universal convulsion. The fever is some¬ 
 times slight, and sometimes violent. It is very remark¬ 
 able both for its sudden rise and declension; so that in 
 the first hour of this illness, the child shall be perfectly 
 cool; in the second, flushed and burning hot; and in 
 the third, temperate again. 
 
 I M ' Z i ft j, >. * ' ». * * * i > - J I j i • \ * i i . • ■ , t 
 
 r ^ t \ ■*' J* ■ ' *« v' f i l l !•./.. / » ( v. V i ' tj ( ' . 1 j ♦ v f • 
 
 The partial or local consequential symptoms are the 
 most various and complicated ; for the appearance they 
 put on is in some degree determined by the nature of 
 the parts they affect; wherefore they imitate various 
 diseases of the human body. These symptoms we 
 shall describe in the order of their most frequent oc¬ 
 currence. 
 
 Diarrhoea , costiveness, loss of appetite, eruptions on 
 the skin, especially on the face and scalp, cough, short¬ 
 ness of breath, with a kind of convulsed respiration, 
 similar to that observable in the hooping-cough, spasms 
 of particular parts, either by intervals or continued, an 
 increased secretion of urine, and sometimes a diminution 
 of that secretion, a discharge of matter from the penis ^ 
 with difficulty and pain in making water, imitating 
 exactly a violent gonorrhoea . 
 
 ' Hh 
 
 The 
 

 236 
 
 OF DENTITION. 
 
 The lymphatic glands of the neck are at this time apt 
 to swell; and if the child has a strong tendency to the 
 scrofula, this irritation will promote that disease. 
 
 There may be many other symptoms with which we 
 are not at all acquainted, the patients in general not being 
 able to express their feelings. Many of the symptoms of 
 this disease are dangerous, namely, the constitutional 
 ones, and also those local symptoms which attack a vital 
 part. The fever, indeed, seldom lasts so long as to be 
 fatal; but the convulsions, especially when universal, 
 frequently are so. Local convulsions, if not in a vital 
 part, although often very violent, do not kill; ard when 
 any part not vital sympathizes, the patient is generally 
 free from danger; a security to the whole being 
 obtained by the sufferings of a part which is of little 
 consequence to life. 
 
 Universal sympathy seems to be the first effect of 
 irritation, and in general appears as such in those 
 whose local and partial sensation, and irritability, are not 
 yet formed; for, in such subjects, when one part is irri¬ 
 tated, the whole sympathizes, and general convulsions 
 ensue. But as the sensations and partial irritability 
 begin to be formed, each part, in some degree acting 
 for itself, acquires its own peculiarities; so that when a 
 local disease takes place in a patient that is very young, 
 
 it 
 
 i 
 
OF; DFNTITI^. 
 
 it is capable of giving a general disposition to sympa¬ 
 thize ; but as the child advances) the power of sympathy 
 becomes partial, there not being now in the constitution 
 that universal consent of parts; but some one part is 
 found which has a greater aptitude than the rest to fall 
 in with the local irritation; therefore the whole dispo¬ 
 sition for sympathy is directed to some particular part, 
 and it sympathizes according to its own peculiar 
 action. This arises from the different organs acquiring 
 more and more their own independent sensations as 
 the child grows older, and gradually losing the power 
 of sympathizing with one another: so that, by the age 
 of six. years, few parts suffer but those immediately 
 affected; and in adults, who cut their Teeth, we almost 
 always find the pain and other symptoms confined to 
 the part, or only local sympathy taking place; such as 
 a swelling of the side of the face. 
 
 But as the symptoms become more confined, the suf¬ 
 fering part is often much more violently affected, than 
 where it has a power of taking in the other parts. 
 Therefore we find that, in adults, the pain of cutting a 
 Grinder is frequently excessive, and that the local inflam¬ 
 mation is very considerable, and often of long continu¬ 
 ance*. This is not the case with children; their 
 
 H h 2 pain 
 
 * Vide Case the Third, 
 
OF DENTITION. 
 
 23S 
 
 pain does not appear to be so very considerable, and 
 we are certain that the local inflammation is not great; 
 that it is confined to the very parts which suffer, and 
 is not diffused over the face ; so that in children the 
 symptoms of sympathy are often more violent than 
 those of the parts themselves. Though it is generally 
 a fact, that the symptoms of Dentition, in adults, are 
 confined to the parts immediately injured, it is not 
 always or certainly so ; for sometimes, as will appear 
 from Case the Fourth, there will be the strongest symp¬ 
 toms imaginable from sympathy; which seems to be 
 owing to a peculiar aptitude in the constitution to uni¬ 
 versal sympathy. These pains in the adult are often 
 periodical, having their regular and fixed periods, from 
 which circumstance they are often supposed to be aguifh, 
 and the bark is administered, but without effect. Medi¬ 
 cines for the rheumatism are likewise given with as 
 little success; when a Tooth will appear, and disclose 
 the cause of the complaint, and, by lancing the gums, 
 the cure often is performed; but the disease will recur, 
 if the gum happens to heal over the Tooth, which it 
 will very readily do, if the Tooth is pretty deep. As 
 these Teeth are generally slower in their growth than 
 the others, and more especially those which come very 
 late, they become the cause of many returns of the 
 symptoms. How far children under this circumstance 
 are subject to paroxysms of the disease, is not an easy 
 
 thing 
 
OF DENTITION. 
 
 239 
 
 thing to determine ; but from many of their sympathetic 
 symptoms going off and returning, it would appear that 
 they have also their exacerbation. 
 
 1 '' J 1 " ^ •• ' - - • - . • * ■ J , : i . , 
 
 Of the Cure . 
 
 The cure of diseases arising from Dentition, from 
 their nature, can only be temporary and local, even 
 when it is directed to the real seat of the disease ; 
 and certainly every method of cure which is not so 
 directed, must prove ineffectual, as it can only operate 
 by destroying the effect. Opiates, indeed, will in some 
 degree take off the irritation, by destroying the sensi¬ 
 bility of the part; but surely it would be better at once 
 to remove the cause than to be attempting from time 
 to time to remove or palliate the effect. When the 
 sympathy is partial, and not in a vital part, it would 
 be better to allow it to continue than cure it, because it 
 may by such means become universal: for instance, if 
 it is a diarrhoea, the best way is to allow it to go on, or 
 at least only correct it, if too violent, which is often the 
 case. I have seen cases, where the stomach and intes¬ 
 tines have sympathized so much, as almost to threaten 
 death. The small quantity of nourishment that the 
 stomach could admit of, was hurried off by the intes¬ 
 tines. 
 
 Of 
 
240 OF DENTITION 
 
 m ,' 401 X 1 TH 3 O tO 
 
 leum lortloto ,HlooT oHi xovo won doth «i moil 
 
 -biovisnii eB u {Ioe22003n 
 
 92B92U 
 
 W V Jk -4 
 
 »riJ ZB 
 
 As far as my experience has taught me, to cut the 
 gum down to the Teeth appears to be the only method 
 of cure. It acts either by taking off the tension upon 
 the gum, arising from the growth of the Tooth, or by 
 preventing the ulceration which must otherwise take 
 place, .nisq 3 *xorn $vig f gni 82 £q ni yffijorftib siohi 
 ,>j 1£ q Jls 3£jdh bnh sw *ioi $ 83ob 1 03 yimmoo o?Ib 21 ziAi 
 
 r * 1 t > * t 
 
 It often happens, particularly when the operation is 
 performed early in the disease, that the gum will reunite 
 over the Teeth ; in which case the same symptoms 
 will be produced, and they must be removed by the 
 same method. 
 
 I have performed the operation above ten times upon 
 the same Teeth, where the disease had recurred so 
 often, and every time with the absolute removal of 
 the symptoms, 
 
 j loft Ol 07£ nt331 3101 3n 1 
 
 It has been asserted, that to cut the gum once will 
 be sufficient, not only to remove the present, but to 
 prevent any future bad symptoms from the same cause. 
 This is contradictory to experiment, and the known 
 laws of the animal ceconomy; for frequently the gum, 
 
 • V. r. ' \ f * A ‘ • 
 
 from 
 
 t 
 
5241 
 
 OF DENTITION. 
 
 from its thickness over the Tooth, or other causes, must 
 necessarily heal up again, and the relapse is as unavoid¬ 
 able as the original disease. 
 
 ' - jr » i & -rffTt Hrd • A 
 
 ^JL J ▲ 4« V 4 . >• ' r* '* * ' f) f r f>*T p f '' J "i "jf f 5 ^ > /111 fu‘> J. •’ • ' 
 
 A vulgar prejudice prevails against this practice, from 
 an objection, that if the gum is lanced so early as to 
 admit of a re-union, the cicatrised part will be harder 
 than the original gum, and therefore the Teeth will find 
 more difficulty in passing, and give more pain. But 
 this is also contrary to facts; for we find that all parts 
 which have been the seat either of wounds or sores, are 
 always more ready to give way to pressure, or any other 
 disease which attacks either the part itself or the con¬ 
 stitution. Therefore each operation tends to make the 
 passing of the Teeth easier. 
 
 When the Teeth begin to give pain, we find them 
 generally so far formed, as to be easily discerned through 
 the gum. 
 
 The fore Teeth are to observed at first, not on the 
 edge of the gum, but on the fore part, making risings 
 there, which appear whiter than the other parts: and 
 it may be observed, that the gums are broader than 
 usual. At this period the incisions must be made pretty 
 deep, till the Tooth be felt with the instrument, other¬ 
 wise little effect will be produced by the operation : and 
 
 this 
 
OF DENTITION. 
 
 °49 
 
 this is the general rule with respect to the depth of the 
 incision in all cases. 
 
 When the Grinders shoot into the gum, they flatten 
 the edge of the gum, and make it broad. These 
 Teeth are more easily hit by the instrument than the 
 fore Teeth. 
 
 The operation should not be done with a fine-pointed 
 instrument, such as a common lancet, because most 
 probably the point will be broken off* against the Tooth, 
 which will make the instrument unfit for going on 
 further, if more incisions are required. 
 
 A common lancet, with its point rounded, is a very 
 good instrument; but an instrument, something like 
 a fleam, would be of the most convenient shape. 
 
 There is no need of any great delicacy in the opera¬ 
 tion, the gums being very insensible parts; and to cut 
 through the whole gum down to the Teeth with 
 certainty, when they are pretty deep, requires some 
 force. 
 
 The gums will bleed a little, which may be of 
 service in taking off the inflammation. I never saw a 
 case, where the bleeding either proved inconvenient or 
 
 dangerous. 
 
V 
 
 OF DENTITION. $43 
 
 dangerous. If it ever should be troublesome, I think 
 there could be no great difficulty in stopping it. In 
 general, no application is necessary : the gums soon 
 unite at the most distant part from the Tooth, if it lies 
 deep ; and if it be more superficial, the thin gum soon 
 shrinks back over the Tooth, leaving it bare, and 
 decays. 
 
 This cutting of the Dentes Sapientice is often attended 
 with an inconvenience which does not attend the 
 others; and this happens, I believe, only when they 
 come very late, viz. when the jaws have left off growing* 
 This is the want of room in the jaws for these late 
 Teeth ; a circumstance which produces an addition 
 to the other inconveniences arising from Dentition. 
 When it takes place in the upper jaw, the Tooth is 
 often obliged to grow backwards; and in such a position 
 it sometimes presses on the anterior edge of the Coronoide 
 Process, in shutting the mouth, and gives great pain. 
 When it takes place in the lower jaw, some part of 
 the Tooth continues to lie hid under that process, and 
 covered by the soft parts, which are always liable to 
 be squeezed between that Tooth and the corresponding 
 Tooth in the upper jaw. To open very freely, is 
 absolutely necessary in these cases: but even this is 
 often not sufficient. Nothing but drawing the Tooth, 
 or Teeth, will remove the e^il in many cases. 
 
 ■I i CASES. 
 
 r 
 
244 
 
 CASES OF DENTITION. 
 
 CASES. 
 
 It would be endless to give histories of cases, exem¬ 
 plifying each symptom of Dentition. I shall only relate 
 a few which are singular; and which, being extraor¬ 
 dinary, will the better enforce the propriety, in all cases, 
 of the cure I have recommended. 
 
 5 4 i ' «- ^ T A 
 
 r j nfi Djli iIJjj l V*)n t jr 
 
 Case I.—A young child was attacked with contrac¬ 
 tions of the musculi jlexo'res of the fingers, and also of 
 the toes. These contractions were so considerable as 
 to keep her fingers and thumb constantly clenched, 
 and so irregularly, that they appeared distorted. All 
 the common antispasmodic medicines were given, and 
 continued for several months, but without success. 
 
 I scarified the gums down to the Teeth, and in less 
 than half an hour all the contractions had ceased. 
 This, however, only gave relief for a time. The gums 
 healed; the Teeth continued to grow, and filled up 
 the new space acquired by the scarifications ; and the 
 same symptoms appeared a second time. 
 
 The former operation was. immediately performed, 
 and with the same success. 
 
 £ Case II. 
 
545 
 
 CASES OF DENTITION. 
 
 Case II.—A boy, about two years of age, was taken 
 with a pain and difficulty in making water; and voided 
 matter from the urethra. I suspected that by some 
 means or other this child might possibly be affected by 
 the venereal poison; and the suspicion naturally fell on 
 the nurse. 
 
 * * y •' tv • ‘V >. 1 A. ‘ '/. i \ J. * •• \ 'jt' t » * X * 
 
 These complaints sometimes abated, and would go 
 off altogether, and then return again. 3t was observed 
 at last, that they returned only upon his cutting a new 
 Tooth: this happened so often, regularly and constantly, 
 that there was no reason to doubt but that it was owing 
 to that cause. 
 
 Case III.—A lady, about the age of five or six and 
 twenty years, was attacked with a violent pain in the 
 upper jaw; which at last extended through the whole 
 side of the face, similar to a violent Tooth-ach, from a 
 cold; and was attended with consequent fever. 
 
 It was treated at first as a cold; but, from its conti¬ 
 nuance, was afterwards supposed to be nervous. 
 
 The case was represented to me from the country ; 
 and I gave the best directions that I could, on a 
 representation of the symptoms. 
 
 ! I i 2 
 
 She 
 
2.46 
 
 CASES OF DENTITION. 
 
 She came to London some months after, still labour¬ 
 ing under the same complaint. Upon examining the 
 mouth, I observed one of the points of the Dens Sa - 
 pientice ready to come through. I lanced the gums, and 
 the disorder gave way immediately. 
 
 \ 
 
 A lady, about the same age, was attacked with a vio¬ 
 lent pain in the left side of her face. It was regu- 
 
 r . , 0 
 larly periodical, coming on at six o’clock in the even¬ 
 ing. She took the Peruvian bark, which had no effect. 
 She took antimonials, and Dovar’s powder, which 
 also were equally ineffectual. But one of the points of 
 the De?is bapienttce or the upper jaw, or the same side, 
 appearing, shewed the cause, and indicated the remedy. 
 
 , , . U - | «tei$qra«> iswol bns isqqt 4 
 
 The gums were lanced* and the pain ceased. 
 
 rf oJ xqn&hji moii x !o nolteonol oriT t wio 
 
 e rijooi nojguxfoiq brtr t J33hx>?i ori.t tjir sfnifri A srd Hh 
 
 ;:lj Io .9^1 >■ in -?iu owi Io ariT ,8^1 
 
 •i«i sw io.'x' 'ft baiUo jkdw vd ,lo .q 8* f no vvt'jds 
 
 «ois<riJ 07 nolsfec/qgff- •/.» * r \i frvfe ^y? usifertr .sronsttou? 
 
 • i;i tto iflottxwm I *\i ;r,- r\i?/ >:■& arnojqnvf? 
 
 ; ’ >: \ ■•La.: "Wjci!. i ,->v- ■. : s/i.* Io fcws>Vtmi*&. 
 
 . .iswttu 3^2 »soi '.vii ^nmabtsd iii sex/ iferiJ ^uiv$rVi\iV 
 
 ,D 
 
 - ,0;. ' mis -^i 
 
 >3 HOMoi U*ol falpofret jSMWtS. 
 
 Jam: ^diooia to oviso wi 
 
 v • - -• 
 
 >’ • * 
 
 INDEX. 
 
/ 
 
 
 MOlTlJWfQ" x.233 AO 
 
 •^u/ockl Ithte r i3ii£ tdbaom 30102 nobnoJ o 1 srno 3il3 
 oih giT^nifrra^ noqij 4nhsIqmqo 3ffi£2 srta isbnrj gm 
 :'mO s ./n io 83nioq srh lo 3no bav^do I ^fhaorn 
 
 IN D E X. °* 
 
 .^blsibcrnxrii ^£w sv&g i^bioeib s'xj? 
 
 -oiv £ xfoiwIbioBfts sjsw 3rl* iuodfi <^b£l A 
 
 a >ii 7^d do. obia }ta[ adj ni meq tow* 
 
 AlBSCESSES of the antrum maxillare, symptoms and causes of, 174, 
 Treatment of, 175. 
 
 . . in the jaws, when deeply seated, how to be treated, 171. See 
 
 Gum-bi le 
 
 t * f f t f~r c f 
 
 Adult teeth, progress of their formation, 82. The first grinder decaying at an 
 early age ought to be removed, 206. 
 
 Air a coming in contact with the nerve of a tooth, the cause of pain in, 121. 
 Means for excluding it, 122. IWsCA. Sul 
 
 Alveolar process, in the upper jaw, described, 2. In the lower jaw, 3. Of the 
 upper and lower jaw compared, 4. The sockets of the Teeth, how formed, 6. 
 In both jaws are rather to be considered as belonging to the teeth* than as parts 
 of the jaw, 7. The formation of, traced from infancy to adult age, 74. Decay 
 of by wasting, 177. A filling up of the socket, and protrusion of the tooth, 
 178. The cause of these two disorders inquired into, 179. Effects of the 
 scurvy on, 180. Decay of, by what is called the scurvy of the gums, 185. 
 
 Animal substances, instances shewing their disposition to unite, 127. 
 
 Antrum maxillare , symptoms and causes of abcesses in, 174. Treatment of, 175. 
 
 Articulation of the lower jaw described, 9. Of the teeth, 65. 
 
 Astringents , their use in hardening the gums, 182. See Gums . 
 
 B. 
 
 Bicuspides , particular description of that class of teeth, 55. Their use, 57. 
 
 Breath , rendered foul by rotten teeth, 147. See Scurvy. 
 
 Burning the nerve of a tooth, method of performing, 149. Of the ear, sometimes 
 successful in the tooth-ach, 150. 
 
 C. 
 

 / *'■ 
 
 t 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 G. 
 
 Calculi, human, how formed, 96, 125. 
 
 Cartilage, moveable, in the articulation of the jaws, described, ro. Principal 
 
 use of, 13. ^ q 0 ;sni!Is>w8 •$£! 
 
 Caustics , how to apply, to the nerve of a tooth, 149. 
 
 Cells for the Teeth, how formed, 75. See Alveolar Processes . 
 
 Chin , how projected forwards in aged persons, 73. 
 
 Circulation of the animal fluids, the usual consequences of its interruption, 125. 
 
 Cleaning of the teeth, various methods of, 196. 'Pendency of vegetable food to the 
 same purpose, 197. 
 
 Coronoide process in the under jaw, described, 4. The cells for the grinders formed 
 in the root of, 75. 
 
 Cuspidati , or canine teeth, particular description of, 52. Their use, 54. The 
 frequent irregularity of, to what owing, 198. 
 
 D. 
 
 Dead teeth, in what cases they are preferable to living ones, for transplantation, 21.9. 
 The objections they are liable to, 226. 
 
 Dentes sapientia , particular description of those teeth, 60. A frequent incon¬ 
 venience in the cutting of, 243. Violent pain from the cutting of, 246. 
 
 Dentition , cause of the pain in, explained, 80, 233. Symptoms of, 234. Origin 
 of these symptoms accounted for, 236. Methods of relief and cure, 239. 
 Lancing the gums, 240. Contractions of the fingers and toes produced by, 244. 
 
 Denudation, the decay of teeth by, described, 155. See Scurvy. 
 
 Digastricus, description and use of this muscle, 25. 
 
 Diseases of the teeth specified, 121. 
 
 Drawing of teeth, the proper indications for, 2ir. Consequence of deferring the 
 operation too long, 212. Directions for the performance, 213. Remarks on 
 the usual treatment of the gums, 214. How to stop the extraordinary bleeding 
 of the gums, 215. No bad consequences to be apprehended from breaking the 
 alveolar processes, ibid. Breaking of teeth, 216. How to replace a tooth when 
 drawn by mistake, 224. 
 
 E. 
 
 ; ; y ' - * • • ' : • • ‘ ' * ; • ’ . ' ' ' ! * 
 
 Par , burning of, sometimes successful in the tooth-ach, 150. 
 
 Enamel of the teeth, description and use of, 33. Experiments on, to ascertain the 
 nature of its composition, 34. Formation of, explained, 94. 
 
 F. 
 
I N D E X. 
 
 Face y how shortened in aged persons, 73. 
 
 Fangs of teeth, comparative observations on, 62. How formed, 90. Will con¬ 
 tinue sound when the tooth is destroyed, 138. Swelling of, described, 158. 
 Fingers and toes, case where a contraction of, was produced by dentition, 244. 
 Fluids , animal, the consequences of their stagnation pointed out, 125. 
 
 Foetus, progress of the formation of the teeth in, explained, 77. 
 
 Grinders, particularly described, 58. Difference between those on the upper, and 
 those on the under jaw, 60. The removal of the first, when decaying at an 
 early age, recommended, 206. 
 
 Gums, the nature and use of, explained, 66. How affected by dentition, 80. 
 Excrescences from, how to be treated, 169. Effect of the scurvy on, 180. 
 Treatment of in this case, ibid. Symptoms of the disorder vulgarly called the 
 scurvy of, 184. The cause of, investigated, 185. Proper treatment of in this 
 case, 186. Callous thickenings of, 188. When of a cancerous nature, require 
 chirurgical treatment, ibid. Remarks on the common treatment of in drawing 
 teeth, 214. Method of checking the extraordinary bleeding of, when a tooth is 
 drawn, 215. An attentive examination into the state of, necessary, when teeth 
 are to be transplanted, 217. When they ought to be cut, to facilitate dentition, 
 240, 245, 246. 
 
 Gum-biles , the causes of explained, 160. Extraction of the affected tooth, the 
 only cure of, in the last resort, 165. How to open and dress them, 166. 
 
 Treatment of in the back part of the mouth, 167. See Abscesses and Scurvy. 
 
 II. 
 
 Hemlock , successfully used in nervous pains in the jaws, 191. 
 
 Hollow teeth, methods of stopping, 152. 
 
 I. 
 
 'Jaw, the upper, its form, and the bones of which it is composed, 1. Lower, 
 described, 3. The articulation of the lower, explained, 9. The several 
 motions of which it is capable, 12. The muscles subservient to these motions, 
 15. Critical remarks on these motions, 29. The full usual number of 
 
 teeth 
 
teeth on each, 46. Difference between the grinders in the upper, and those in the 
 lower, 60, The motion of, in young and old persons, compared, 72. The growth 
 of, explained, 101. Abscesses in, how to be treated, 171. Cautions relative to 
 nervous pains in, 190. Irregularities between, and the teeth, 207. Method of 
 rectifying the projection of the lower one, 209. See Alveolar Processes. 
 
 Inclsores, the class of teeth so called, particularly described, 49. 
 
 Incrustations , on the teeth, the nature of, explained, 192. Mechanical methods of 
 removing, 196. Chemical applications, 197. See Scaling. 
 
 Inflammation of the teeth, symptoms of, 143. Treatment of, 15c. 
 
 L. 
 
 Lancet , the proper form of, for cutting the gums, to promote dentition, 242. 
 
 ) * ** s-- VXt'- * ■ *. *, • 
 
 *•'' * • W • v V 5 > ‘i4 
 
 M. 
 
 Madder , the effects of, on the teeth of a young pig, 37. See Ossification. 
 
 Many whether to be ranked in the clafs of carnivorous animals, from his teeth, 119. 
 Masseter muscle, its description and uses, 16. 
 
 Mastication , the several motions of the under jaw in, 13. Action of the teeth in, 68. 
 Mercury , the taking of, destructive to the transplantation of teeth, 219. 
 
 Milk teeth, progress of the formation of, in the foetus, 77. See Dentition. 
 
 Molares , origin of the formation of, in the foetus, 78. 
 
 Mortification of the teeth, symptoms of, 137. Inquiry into the cause of, 141. 
 Prevention and cure of, 147, 
 
 I ' . ; 
 
 N. 
 
 # 
 
 Nerve of a tooth, if exposed to the air, the seat of the tooth-ach, 114, 121, Method 
 of sheltering it from the air, 122. Method of burning it, . 149. 
 
 o. , 
 
 Ossification , the general progress of, different from the formation of teeth, 39. Of a 
 tooth upon the pulp, explained, 88. See Dentition . 
 
 P. 
 
 : ~ c - - '• 1 ; ; v ' ‘ '.- - 
 
 Periosteum of the teeth described, 43. 
 
 Posterior process in the under jaw described, 4. 
 
 Processes', see Alveolar , Coronoide, and Posterior, 
 
 Projection 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Projection of the under jaw, method of rectifying, 209. 
 
 Pterygoidcsus internus , its description and ufe, 22. Th q pterygoidaus externus , 23. 
 
 R. 
 
 * — - / 
 
 Rabbit mouth, means of rectifying, 204. 
 
 Replacing of a tooth drawn by mistake, instructions for, 224* 
 
 Rickets , the growth of teeth not affected by that disorder, 40. 
 
 Roof of the mouth, osteological description of, 2. 
 
 Rotting of the teeth, symptoms and consequences of, 135. Inquiry into the cause of, 
 141. Whether a rotten tooth has any contaminating power, 142. Symptoms of 
 inflammation, 143. Is cured only by extraction, 147. The breath rendered foul by, 
 ibid. Prevention and cure of, 148. 
 
 s. 
 
 Scaling of teeth, the utility of this operation, 124. Caution in, 196. 
 
 Scion teeth, instructions for the choice of, 221. 
 
 Scurvy , effects of that disorder on the gums and alveolar processes, 180. Is the first 
 object of cure, 182. Of the gums, 184. 
 
 Sensibility of the teeth accounted for, 114. 
 
 Shedding of teeth, the process of, explained, 98. The necessity of a new fet pointed 
 out, 105. 
 
 Stopping of hollow teeth, method of performing, 152. 
 
 Stumps of teeth, the state in which they usually remain, 138; 
 
 Supernumerary teeth, the origin of, accounted for, 115.’ Ought to be removed, 208. 
 
 Sympathy , the cause of the disorders incident to dentition, 236. The fymptoms of, in 
 children, often more violent than in the parts immediately affected, 237. How adults 
 are affected by it, 238. To be cured by local application, 239. 
 
 T. 
 
 Teeth, the sockets for, how formed, 6. The alveolar processes belong rather to 
 them than to the jaws, 7. Description and use of the enamel, 33. The interior 
 substance of, 36. Whether vascular or not, 37. The growth of, different from 
 that of bones, 39. The growth of, not affected by the rickets, 40. The cavity 
 
 K k in 
 
INDEX. 
 
 in, 41. The periosteum of, 43. The natural situation of, 44. The full number 
 of, 46. The several classes of, 47. The incifores, 49. The cufpidati, 52. 
 The bicufpides, 55. The grinders, 58. Their fangs, 62. Articulation of, 65. 
 Action of, from the motion of the lower jaw, 68. The cells for, how formed, 75. 
 Formation of, in the foetus, 77. Cause of the pain in dentition, explained, 80. 
 Adult, progress of their formation, 82. A third set, sometimes formed in old age, 
 S4. Manner of formation, 86. Process of shedding, aescribed, 98. Reason of 
 the shedding of, 105. How the cavity fills up with new matter as they wear down, 
 108. Whether they continue to grow after being completely former!, 110. The 
 sensibility of, accounted for, 114. Supernumerary, how they originate, 115. 
 How they affect the voice, 117. Whether man is proved to be a carnivorous 
 animal by his teeth, 119. The diseases they are subject to, 121. Of cleaning 
 them, 124. Tranfplantation of, 126. Decay of, by rotting, 135. Inquiry into 
 the cause of iheir rotting, 141. Whether a rotten tooth has any contaminating 
 power, 142. Symptoms of inflammation, 143. The pain of, brought on by circum¬ 
 stances unconnected with the disease, 145. Prevention and cure of rottenness in, 
 147. Methods of burning the nerve, 149. Methods of stopping them where 
 hollow, 152. Decay of, by denudation, 155. Swelling of the fangs described, 158. 
 The nature and causes of gum-biles, 160. Treatment of, 165. Incrustation of 
 extraneous matter upon, 192. Mechanical methods of removing, 196. Chemical 
 applications to, 197. Irregularity in the position of, to what owing, 198. The 
 operation of moving them described, 202. Cautions as to the extraction of those 
 that are irregular, 203. Method of rectifying what is called the rabbit mouth, 204. 
 The proper indications for drawing them, 211. Consequence of deferring the 
 operation too long, 213. Directions for the performance, ibid. Instructions for 
 the transplantation of teeth, 217. 
 
 Temporal muscle, its description and uses, 19. 
 
 Tooth-ach, is caused by the exposure of the nerve of the tooth to the air, 114, 121. 
 How to stop a hollow tooth, 122. Method of burning the nerve, 149. Other 
 modes of treatment, 150. Cautions in relation to nervous pains in the jaws, 190. 
 Instructions for the drawing of teeth, 212. 
 
 Transplantation of teeth, facility of this operation, 126. Successful performance of, 179. 
 General remarks on, 217. Necessary attentions to the state of the gums and 
 sockets, 218. In what cases dead teeth are preferable to living ones, 219. In 
 what cases it ought not to be attempted, ibid. Ought not to be attempted on 
 persons while taking of mercury, 220. The proper age for the performance of, 
 ibid. Directions for the choice of scion teeth, 221. Of replacing a sound tooth 
 when drawn by mistake, 224. Successful instance of replaced teeth, 225. Of dead 
 
 teeth 
 
 I 
 
INDEX, 
 
 teeth, aa6. How teeth are to be fixed and tied, 227. How the patient is 10 
 conduct himself, 228. Accidents to which transplanted teeth are liable, 229. Evi¬ 
 dences of a living union between transplanted teeth and their sockets, 230. 
 
 V. 
 
 Vegetable food, its disposition to keeping the teeth clean, 197. 
 
 Voice , how affected by the teeth, 117. 
 
 Urethra , case where a disorder of, was produced by dentition, 244, 
 
 T HE E N D. 
 
 0 
 
 W. Spilsbury, Printer, 57> Snowhill. 
 
' 
 
 .. 
 
 •j 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 > . 
 
 
 % * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V . • 
 
 r ■ 
 
 ;.■■■■ \ ' .. ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 # 
 

EXPLANATION 
 
 O F T H E 
 
 PLATES, 
 
 PLATE I. 
 
 FIG. I. 
 
 A Reprefentation of the under-fide of the Upper-Jaw, without the 
 Teeth. 
 
 aaaaa The outer line of the circle,, or what is commonly called 
 the outer plate of the Alveolar procefs. 
 
 b b b The inner line of the circle, commonly called the inner plate. 
 c c The io fingle Sockets, viz. for the Incifores, Cufpidati, and 
 Bicufpides. 
 
 dd The 3 double Sockets for the Molary, or triple-fanged Teeth. 
 The two firft have three fockets, and the laft only two. 
 
 
 Fig. II. A reprefentation of the upper part of the Lower-Jaw, fhew- 
 ing particularly the Sockets of the Teeth. 
 
 a The Sockets of the ten fingle-fanged Teeth. 
 b The fockets of the 3 double-fanged Teeth, 
 
PLATE I 
 
 Fuj. /. 
 
 ' a 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 ■ 
 
 - 
 
 . - * 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 ■ i . 
 
 . : 
 
 * •• 
 
 , • • . V ' 
 
 • ■ 
 
 . • 
 
 ... . . - 
 
 *•* ■ ■ • ■ ■ . 
 
 . 
 
 7 • • i. 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
PLATE 
 
 II. 
 
 A Sketch of the Head to explain what was faid of the motions of 
 the Lower-Jaw. 
 
 A The Se&ion of the Head which was made to bring the Artict^ 
 lation of the Lower-Jaw into view. 
 
 B Lower-Jaw. 
 
 C The condyle of the Lower-Jaw. 
 
 D The occipital condyle of the Head. 
 
 E F The Digaftric Mufcle. 
 
 E Its origin. 
 
 E Its infertion. 
 
 G G G The Vertebra of the Neck. 
 
 H The Meatus Auditorius ext emus. 
 
 I The hollow, or cavity in the temporal bone for the articulation of 
 the Lower- Taw. 
 
 %s 
 
 K The eminence before that cavity, likewifefor articulation- 
 L The moveable cartilage of the Joint- 
 
 / 
 
PLAT E IL 
 
 V 
 
 PuMzo/u//■/€('<> fa Act of Pwr/zor me/if JAzi/y A). fJJI- (y I Johnson ■ 
 
 5A* 
 
P L 
 
 ATE III. 
 
 Fig. L A front view of the Upper and Lower-Jaws of an adult ? 
 with a full fet of Teeth. 
 aaaaa The Upper-Jaw. 
 
 lb Its attachment to the check-bones below the orbits. 
 cc The Lower-Jaw. 
 
 Fig. II. A fide view of both Jaws in the fame ftate. 
 
 A AAA The Upper-Jaw. „ 
 
 B B The body of the Lower-Jaw. 
 
 C Its afcending procefs. 
 
 D The Root of the Coronoid Procefs. 
 
 E The Condyle. 
 
 F F F F The fluted Alveolar Procefles. 
 
 
 # 
 

 
 P/th//.f/f's/{/rrsryW/'tf/r /<" sirf~o/ 7 , rr/-//rr?>?f?tf .\f/r>/ /.■J'.///•/. //// f, f/'////.n'tr. 
 
PLATE 
 
 IV. 
 
 Fig. I. The bafis of the fkull, and of the Upper-Jaw, with a full 
 fet of Teeth ; fhewing the cutting edges and grinding furfaces of the 
 Teeth of the Upper-Jaw, and the cavity and eminence of the tempo¬ 
 ral bone for the articulation of the Lower-Jaw. 
 a a a a The four lncifores. 
 b b The two Cufpidati. 
 c c The four Bicufpides. 
 d d The fix Grinders. 
 
 e e The two cavities in the temporal bones for the articulation of 
 the condyles of the Lower-Jaw. 
 
 // The two eminences upon which the condyles move, in many 
 actions of that bone. 
 
 Fig. II. A view, from above and behind, of the Lower-Jaw, with a 
 full fet of Teeth ; fhewing the cutting edges and grinding furfaces of 
 the Teeth in that Jaw, with the Coronoid ProcelTes, and condyles for 
 articulation. 
 
 a a a a The four lncifores . 
 b b The two Cufpidati . 
 cc The four Bicufpides . 
 dd The fix Grinders. 
 e e The Coronoid ProcelTes. 
 
 /f The Condyles. 
 
 Fig 111. The moveable cartilage of the joint of the Lower-Jaw. 
 a The cut furface of a longitudinal fedlion of it. The lower and con¬ 
 cave furface is what is articulated with the Condyle; the upper and 
 convex furface is what is in contact with the Temporal Bone. 
 
riA run 
 
 T7.7' /m 
 

 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ :n 
 
 
 
PLATE 
 
 V. 
 
 Two views of the fixteen Teeth of one fide of both Jaws, taken 
 out of their fockets to expofe the whole of each Tooth. 
 
 Row r. The Teeth of the Upper Jaw, feen from the outfide. 
 
 Row 2. The fame view of the Teeth of the Lower-Jaw: the live 
 
 fingie are fimilar to thofe in the Upper-Jaw, but the Grinders in this 
 
 have onlv two fan^s. 
 
 — - - o 
 
 a a The two Incifors .. ; 
 
 b The Cufpidatus , (hewing in the fame view how much it is longer- 
 than the others. 
 
 cc The Bicufpidcs. 
 
 d d The two firft Grinders, having three fangs. 
 
 e The third Grinder, or Dens Sapienti£ having alfo three fangs. 
 
 Row 3 and 4. A fide view of the fame Teeth, (hewing that the 
 Incifores and Cufpidati in this view differ from the former view more 
 than the Bicufpides or Grinders. 
 
 Row 3, a a The two Incifores of the Upper-Jaw, (hewing the hoR 
 lowed inner furface of the body of thofe Teeth. 
 
 b The CufpidatuSy (hewing the fame. 
 
 c c The Bicufpides , Ihewing the two points on the bafis of each* 
 The firft of them has a forked fang. 
 
Jl 
 
 PLATE l 
 
 jr fo Art ?'/ litr/**t tne-nt Afrrt/ /a. /JJ /. 61/ / Jo/t-njort. 
 
PLATE 
 
 VI. 
 
 Fig. I. A fide view of the Upper and Lower-Jaw, in which the 
 outer plate of the Alveolar Procefs 'was taken off to expofe the Fangs 
 of the Teeth in their fockets. The length of each fang is at once 
 feen with refpett to its neighbour, and this kind of articulation pointed 
 out at one view. 
 
 Fig. II. A view of the infide of the Teeth of both Jaws in their 
 natural fituation when the mouth is fhut. In this view the fpedcator’s 
 eye is fuppofed to be placed behind and below the two Jaws. 
 
PL A TP VI 
 
 PtwluAielto Ac/ <‘/A\rr//<in/c/i t Mn/ /.>, S'/'//- /•>/ 
 

PLATE 
 
 The bones of the head of a very old woman, who had loft her 
 Teeth a confiderable time before death. The whole Alveolar Pro- 
 cefies are gone in both Jaws, which allows of the Lower-Jaw being 
 raifed about two Inches higher than what is common in (hutting the 
 mouth, before the gums of both Jaws can come into contatft ; by 
 this increafed motion of the Lower-Jaw, the chin is brought more 
 upon a line with the articulation, therefore projects beyond the Upper- 
 Jaw confiderably. 
 
PLATEVU 
 
 
 WyAf y4 
 
 WMmMMMwMmmk 
 
 ||||p|„JY 
 ■ '•■■•' - ' 
 
 HM 
 
 / m 
 
 ^ y'’: ' '., 
 
 Pn />//■>/> ’</ (fc< -nt'(///fy /<> < A/ of Erif/ta /no/t/ W/t // Ai /‘j/'jfl • ty IJoUtwit. 
 
 *sc 
 
 rty/{ ftr/V\ 
 
 ’MftVH f 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
—- 
 
PLATE 
 
 VIII. 
 
 This plate fliews the gradual growth of the two Jaws, efpecially of 
 the Alveolar Procefles. 
 
 Fig. I, and II. One fide of the Lower and of the Upper-Jaw of 
 a Foetus about three or four months old. 
 
 a a The groove which is afterwards formed into Sockets. 
 
 Fig. III. and IV. One fide of the Lower and of the Upper-Jaw of 
 a Foetus about fix months old, at which age {a a) fome of the partitions 
 have fhot acrofs near the anterior part, forming diftind cells. 
 
 Fig. V. and VI. The Upper and Lower-Jaw of a new born child, 
 filewing the laft mentioned circumfiance in a more advanced Hate. 
 
 Fig. VII. The Lower-Jaw of a child feven or eight months old, 
 in which the two firft Incifores had cut the gum, filewing the fockets 
 of fix Teeth. 
 
 a a The mouths of the Alveoli, con traded over the Teeth, efpecially 
 thofe of the Grinders, where they have not yet begun to open for the 
 pafifage of the Teeth. 
 
 Fig. VIII. A fketch of an Upper-Jaw where the Cufpidatus of that 
 fide had been formed high up in the Jaw, and therefore never could 
 appear through the Gum. a The fang of the Cufpidatus. b Its body 
 contained in the Upper-Jaw and Alveolar Procefs. 
 
 Fig. IX. A fketch of the Upper-Jaw of a child, where the Cuf\ 
 pidatus was inverted, fo that its point was turned up againfl: the Jaw,, 
 and the growing mouth of its cavity towards the Gum. a The point 
 of the Cufpidatus turned up againfl: the Jaw. b The open and growing 
 part of the Tooth which fhould be formed into a fang. 
 
 Fig. X. The out-line of the Lower-Jaw of a child, to fhew that 
 the Condyle is then nearly on a line with the Gums. 
 
PitMu/'daca>re/<tit/ fa Ac( t>/’Vflt/utnt'Wt Ifri/ I'jfjfl~/yJJp/tH.>rH. 
 

PLATE 
 
 IX. 
 
 Fig. I. One Tide of the Upper and Lower-Jaw of a fubjeft about 
 eight or nine years of age, where the Incifores and Cufpidati of the Foetus 
 were (bed, and their fuccefiors rifing in new fockets; (hewing like- 
 wife the two Grinders of the child, with the Bicufpides forming under¬ 
 neath. The fir ft adult Grinder was ready to cut the Gum; and the 
 fecond Grinder in the Lower-Jaw is lodged in the root of the Choronoid 
 Procefs, and in the Upper-Jaw it is in the tubercle. 
 
 Fig. II. Part of the Lower-Jaw cut through at the fymphyfis. The 
 Incifor of the child is Handing in its focket, and the adult Incifor form¬ 
 ing in a difiindt focket underneath. 
 
 Fig. III. Another view of the fame piece of the Jaw, to fhew that 
 the Bicufpides are formed in difiindt fockets of their own, and not in. 
 the focket of the Grinder which Hands above. 
 
 Fig. IV. The five Teeth in the half of each Jaw of a Foetus of 
 feven or eight months, (hewing the progrefs of ofiification from the firfi 
 Incifor to the fecond Grinder. 
 
 Fig. V. The fame teeth fomewhat farther advanced. 
 
 Fig. VI. The Teeth of a child of eight or nine years of age, (hew¬ 
 ing the five temporary Teeth in a more advanced Hate, with the firfi 
 adult Grinder. The adult Incifores and one Cujpidatus are alfo begun to ; 
 be formed. 
 
Ptt/flt't/fs/a/'wrr/t/fr/ /<! . ]/•/ \frt tf /.$, ijyi . ty 
 
 

P L A T E 
 
 X. 
 
 Fig. I. The Teeth of one fide of both Jaws, from a child of five 
 or fix years of age. B B,C C The temporary Teeth almoft completely 
 formed. A D, Seven, viz. four above and three below, of the fuc- 
 ceeding Teeth feen at the roots of the firft fet. E E, The body of the 
 firlt adult Grinder nearly formed. 
 
 Fig. II. The Teeth of one fide of both Jaws, from a child of feven 
 years of age. This is an age in which there are more Teeth formed 
 and forming than at any other time of life. B B, C C, The ten tem¬ 
 porary Teeth complete. A D, Ten incomplete to fucceed them. 
 EE, Two adult Grinders; making twenty-two in this fide, and o£ 
 courfe forty-four in the whole. aaaa y The Fangs of the temporary 
 Incifcrs beginning to decay at their points. 
 
pl a te x 
 

PLATE 
 
 XI. 
 
 Fig. I. The Teeth of a child eight or nine years old •, principally to 
 fhew the progrefs of the fecond Set, and the beginning and decay of the 
 firfl Set. 
 
 A A, The firfl Incifores of the fecond or permanent Set. B. The 
 fecond Incifcr. C. The Cufpidatus. D E, The Bicufpides . F G, The 
 two firfl Molares. 
 
 ab. The temporary Incifores , the firfl of which in the lower Jaw is 
 wanting, having been fhed. c, The Cufpidati. d e, The temporary 
 
 Molares, 
 
 Fig. II. The Teeth of a youth about eleven or twelve years old, 
 fhewing the farther progrefs of the one Set towards perfection, and of 
 the other in their decay. 
 
 aaaa , The Incifores of the fecond Set, which had all cut the Gum. 
 bb , The Bafis of the third Molaris or Dens Sapicnti<e. c c, The re¬ 
 maining Molares of the firfl Set, with decayed Fangs, d d. The two 
 firfl Molares of the fecond Set, fo much advanced that they had cut 
 the Gums. 
 
Pn/'/r<<A Arrcccr'i/rrri/ to Act of Pnc/rAtue-nt Jfrt/ /J. /f/t. tn/f T<At/n*n»i. . 
 
PLATE XIL 
 
 ’ Fig, I. The Lower-Jaw of a Foetus, from which part of the Gum 
 and bony focket is taken off, to expofe the membrane which inclofes the 
 Teeth, a , The upper edge of the gum. b bh, The membrane which 
 covers the Teeth. 
 
 Fig. If. The Upper-Jaw of the fame Foetus, fhewing the fame 
 membrane in that Jaw^ 
 
 Fig. III. TheLower-Jaw of a new-born child, where this inclofing 
 membrane is opened, to fbew the bodies of the Teeth that were co¬ 
 vered by it. The blood veffcls which run in its fubftance are alfo ex- 
 pofed. 
 
 tf, The body of the Tooth, b , The membrane. 
 
 Fig. IV. That part of the Jaw and Gum which contains the Cuf- 
 pidatus. The whole is a little magnified. The membrane is opened 
 and turned off on each fide, and the fore part is turned down. The 
 upper part of the pulp is covered with its bony fhell, which is feen by 
 its want of veffels. 
 
 a, The offified part of the Tooth, b , The pulp, c c 9 The membrane 
 opened and turned back. 
 
 Fig. V. and VI. Two pulps magnified. Fig. V. The pulp of the 
 Cufpidatus , Fig. VI. That of the Grinder. The oflifications are remov¬ 
 ed, to fhew that the pulp is of the fame fhape with the Tooth which is 
 formed upon it. As far down on the pulp as the veffels are feen, the 
 offification had advanced ; which fhews that it is more vafcular where 
 the operation of offification is going on. The lower ragged edge, a , i$v 
 part of the Gapfula turned down.. 
 
 Fig. 7. Ore of the Grinders of the Lower-Jaw, fawed down to. 
 expofe the two cavities or canals leading to the body of the Tooth, 
 where they unite, and form a fquare cavity. In thefe two canals are 
 feen two arteries, which run on to the common cavity, and there ra¬ 
 mify. The veins are not injected. The whole is magnified. 
 
 In the body of the Tooth may be oblervrd a number of ftrata, each 
 of which is loft in the circumference of the Tooth. 
 
 a a. The Jaw-bone and Gum cut through, b , The body of the 
 Tooth, c c , The two fangs, d d , The arteries running into the cavities 
 of the fangs. 
 
 Fig. VIII. An Tncifor prepared and magnified in the fame manner,... 
 Shewing the fame circumftances in that Tooth. 
 
JPLAT.EXU 
 
 I 1 r////.iA'<'/ ////</ /osicf t’fP/tr/tani&Jif .Mar/ /<> iyj[/Ay IJipAnMni . 
 
, 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 , • I 
 
 . 
 
 • - . 
 
 ■ - 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 ' 
 
 ■ 
 
 . ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 * * s+~ 
 
 * « ^ 
 
 . 
 
 ' 
 
 .v' • • 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 ‘ 
 
 1 
 
 . 
 
 * 
 
 . 
 
 ' 
 
 . 
 
 , • 
 
 ■ 
 
 . 
 
 1 
 
 . 
 
 ’ 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 • . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
PLATE 
 
 XIII. 
 
 Fig. I. Shews the formation of the cavity and fangs of the Mo- 
 lares. The upper row are thofe of the Lower-Jaw, and the lower 
 thofe of the Upper. A A, a a> is the common cavity in the body of 
 the Tooth, which in the 2d, a a , is deeper than in the firft. B fhews 
 the bony arch thrown over the mouth of the cavity, and dividing that 
 into two openings which give origin to the two fangs. C D E, The 
 progrefs of thefe fangs. F, a Molaris of the Upper-Jaw, where the 
 mouth of the cavity is a little tucked in, at three different points, from 
 which three oflifications fhoot. G fhews thefe ofiifications, and the 
 beginning of three fangs. H I K, fhews the gradual growth of thefe 
 fangs. 
 
 Fig. II. Is a comparative view of the Incifors and Grinders of the 
 child and adult; for the better underftanding of which they are fawed 
 down the middle, fhewing in a fide view the gradual increafe of thefe 
 Teeth. The uppermoft row is of the child, and the lower of the 
 adult, ab c d> Shew the gradual growth of the body, fangs, and cavity 
 of the of Incifors both ages, efg , Shew thefe circumftances in the 
 Grinders. 
 
 Fig. III. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, fhewing the gradual growth of a fingle 
 Tooth, from its firft formation nearly, to its being almoft complete. 
 
 7 
 
 
// // aooorc////? So Act ctPrtf/iutt i rtf t May /J. tjyt. ty IJokn.nrn . 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X* 
 

PLATE 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Fig. I. II. III. IV. V. and VI. Shew the cavities of the Teeth in 
 
 the hfdores , Cufpidatus , Bicufpidatus , and Molares. 
 
 Fig. VII. A Molaris of the Lower-Jaw, with part of its fangs 
 fawed off, to fnew that the fides of the cavity or canal have grown to¬ 
 gether, and divided it into two fmall canals, which are reprefented by. 
 the two dark points. 
 
 Fig. VIII. and IX. The cavity in the body of the Teeth feen in 
 
 tranfverfe fedions. 
 
 Fig. X. and XI. Longitudinal fe6tions of the Molares to expofe the 
 cavities. 
 
 Fig. XII. The bafis of a Molaris whofe points were worn down, 
 and the bony part which projected into thofe points expofed. 
 
 Fig. XIIL A Molaris , whofe bony part is wholly expofed, and only 
 a circle of Enamel left covering the fides all round. 
 
 Fig. XIV. and XV. A lateral view of the Enamel of a Molaris 
 and a Bicufpis cut longitudinally. 
 
 Fig. XVI. A Cufpidatus -worn fo much down, as to expofe the 
 whole end of the bony part, a circle only of Enamel remaining. 
 
 Fig. XVII. An Incifor flit down its axis, to fhewthe Enamel upon- 
 the body of the Tooth, covering much more of the convex than of the 
 concave part. 
 
 Fig. XVIII. An Incifor , fhewing the fame as Fig. XVI. 
 
 Fig. XIX. A horfe’s Tooth flit down its whole length, to fliew 
 how the Enamel is intermixed with the bony part, and that it pafies 
 through the whole length of the Tooth. The Enamel is reprefented 
 by the white lines, which are peniform, (hewing the ftriated texture of 
 the Enamel. 
 
 Fig. XX. The grinding furface of a horfe’s Molaris , to fliew the 
 irregular courfe of the Enamel. 
 
 Fig. XXL An Incifor a little magnified, flit down its middle, to 
 fliew that the Enamel is ftriated, and that the Stria are all turned to¬ 
 wards the centre. 
 
 Fig. XXII. A Grinder in the fame ftate, to fhew the fame circuro- 
 ftances. 
 
 Fig. XXIiL The bafis of a Molaris broken through, (hewing that 
 the Enamel is ftriated in this view alfo, and that all the Stria point to? 
 the centre. N. B. The Teeth muft be broken to (hew thefe fads. 
 
 Fis. XXIV. An old Tooth, whofe bafis has been worn down be- 
 low the original termination of the cavity in the body of the Tooth, 
 and that end has been filled up, in the fame proportion, with new matter, 
 to prevent the cavity being expcfed. This matter is of a darker co¬ 
 lour, as reprefented in the figure. 
 
 Fig. XXV. Another Tooth in the fame ftate. 
 
 O 
 

 !• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • ■;' • -*. 
 .r 
 
 1 * • r 
 
 ’ : ' 
 
 
 : • ti 
 
 ■ *■: :■ v 
 
 . 
 
 
 . -.} J . • 
 
 \ 
 
 ' t. 
 
 
 
 
 
PLATE 
 
 XV. 
 
 Fig. I. A horfe’s Tooth that was juft ready to be (lied. The 
 three parts of the Tooth which ftand up a a a inclofed the rifing end of 
 the young Tooth. This is all that was left of a long. Tooth. 
 
 Fig. II. A feries of Grinders of the child, from their being com¬ 
 plete to their utmoft decay, a is a Grinder of the Upper-Jaw nearly 
 complete, in which the three fangs are almoft formed, b has fome of 
 its fang abforbed, c more, d ftill more, e nearly all gone, and / the 
 whole of the fangs gone, only the neck and body remaining. 
 
 Fig. III. A feries of Incifores in the fame ftate. No. i. A complete 
 formed Tooth. 2. The fang fomewhat decayed. 3. More fo. 4. Still 
 more. 5. The fang almoft gone: and, 6, the whole fang gone, the 
 neck and body only remaining. 
 
 / 
 
 i 
 
 \ 
 
J*///•/(.>/is// </tt/f/ /<’si // (/ Par/sastiestt Mas/ 4 >. If/*• byIJo/iH.urtt • 
 

 < •- •*" - • - 
 
 * < - 
 
 
 ■ * • - • 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 /